1 //===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===// 2 // 3 // The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure 4 // 5 // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source 6 // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. 7 // 8 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 9 // 10 // This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for 11 // SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's 12 // basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed. 13 // 14 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 15 16 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h" 17 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" 18 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h" 19 #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h" 20 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" 21 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" 22 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" 23 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h" 24 #include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h" 25 #include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h" 26 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h" 27 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h" 28 #include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h" 29 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h" 30 #include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h" 31 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h" 32 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h" 33 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h" 34 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h" 35 #include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h" 36 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ISDOpcodes.h" 37 #include "llvm/CodeGen/SelectionDAGNodes.h" 38 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetLowering.h" 39 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h" 40 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetSubtargetInfo.h" 41 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ValueTypes.h" 42 #include "llvm/Config/llvm-config.h" 43 #include "llvm/IR/Argument.h" 44 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h" 45 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h" 46 #include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h" 47 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h" 48 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h" 49 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" 50 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" 51 #include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h" 52 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h" 53 #include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h" 54 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h" 55 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h" 56 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h" 57 #include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h" 58 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h" 59 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h" 60 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h" 61 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h" 62 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h" 63 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h" 64 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h" 65 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" 66 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h" 67 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h" 68 #include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h" 69 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h" 70 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h" 71 #include "llvm/IR/User.h" 72 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h" 73 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h" 74 #include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h" 75 #include "llvm/Pass.h" 76 #include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h" 77 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h" 78 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h" 79 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h" 80 #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h" 81 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h" 82 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h" 83 #include "llvm/Support/MachineValueType.h" 84 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h" 85 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" 86 #include "llvm/Target/TargetMachine.h" 87 #include "llvm/Target/TargetOptions.h" 88 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h" 89 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h" 90 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h" 91 #include <algorithm> 92 #include <cassert> 93 #include <cstdint> 94 #include <iterator> 95 #include <limits> 96 #include <memory> 97 #include <utility> 98 #include <vector> 99 100 using namespace llvm; 101 using namespace llvm::PatternMatch; 102 103 #define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare" 104 105 STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated"); 106 STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated"); 107 STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts"); 108 STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of " 109 "sunken Cmps"); 110 STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses " 111 "of sunken Casts"); 112 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address " 113 "computations were sunk"); 114 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated, 115 "Number of phis created when address " 116 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 117 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated, 118 "Number of select created when address " 119 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 120 STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads"); 121 STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized"); 122 STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded, 123 "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads"); 124 STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized"); 125 STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated"); 126 STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved"); 127 STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches"); 128 STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed"); 129 130 static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts( 131 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 132 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 133 134 static cl::opt<bool> 135 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 136 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 137 138 static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch( 139 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 140 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion.")); 141 142 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs( 143 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 144 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs.")); 145 146 static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking( 147 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 148 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches.")); 149 150 static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract( 151 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 152 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 153 154 static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract( 155 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 156 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 157 158 static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion( 159 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 160 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in " 161 "CodeGenPrepare")); 162 163 static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion( 164 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 165 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) " 166 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare")); 167 168 static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect( 169 "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 170 cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders")); 171 172 static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix( 173 "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), cl::ZeroOrMore, 174 cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions")); 175 176 static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge( 177 "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2), 178 cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / " 179 "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio")); 180 181 static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore( 182 "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 183 cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says.")); 184 185 static cl::opt<bool> 186 EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden, 187 cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating" 188 " the other."), cl::init(true)); 189 190 static cl::opt<bool> DisableComplexAddrModes( 191 "disable-complex-addr-modes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 192 cl::desc("Disables combining addressing modes with different parts " 193 "in optimizeMemoryInst.")); 194 195 static cl::opt<bool> 196 AddrSinkNewPhis("addr-sink-new-phis", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 197 cl::desc("Allow creation of Phis in Address sinking.")); 198 199 static cl::opt<bool> 200 AddrSinkNewSelects("addr-sink-new-select", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 201 cl::desc("Allow creation of selects in Address sinking.")); 202 203 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseReg( 204 "addr-sink-combine-base-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 205 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseReg field in Address sinking.")); 206 207 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseGV( 208 "addr-sink-combine-base-gv", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 209 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseGV field in Address sinking.")); 210 211 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs( 212 "addr-sink-combine-base-offs", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 213 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseOffs field in Address sinking.")); 214 215 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineScaledReg( 216 "addr-sink-combine-scaled-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 217 cl::desc("Allow combining of ScaledReg field in Address sinking.")); 218 219 static cl::opt<bool> 220 EnableGEPOffsetSplit("cgp-split-large-offset-gep", cl::Hidden, 221 cl::init(true), 222 cl::desc("Enable splitting large offset of GEP.")); 223 224 namespace { 225 226 enum ExtType { 227 ZeroExtension, // Zero extension has been seen. 228 SignExtension, // Sign extension has been seen. 229 BothExtension // This extension type is used if we saw sext after 230 // ZeroExtension had been set, or if we saw zext after 231 // SignExtension had been set. It makes the type 232 // information of a promoted instruction invalid. 233 }; 234 235 using SetOfInstrs = SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16>; 236 using TypeIsSExt = PointerIntPair<Type *, 2, ExtType>; 237 using InstrToOrigTy = DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>; 238 using SExts = SmallVector<Instruction *, 16>; 239 using ValueToSExts = DenseMap<Value *, SExts>; 240 241 class TypePromotionTransaction; 242 243 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass { 244 const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr; 245 const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo; 246 const TargetLowering *TLI = nullptr; 247 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI; 248 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI = nullptr; 249 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo; 250 const LoopInfo *LI; 251 std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI; 252 std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI; 253 254 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction 255 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it. 256 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator; 257 258 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block. 259 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with 260 /// multiple load/stores of the same address. The usage of WeakTrackingVH 261 /// enables SunkAddrs to be treated as a cache whose entries can be 262 /// invalidated if a sunken address computation has been erased. 263 ValueMap<Value*, WeakTrackingVH> SunkAddrs; 264 265 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function. 266 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts; 267 268 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their 269 /// promotion for the current function. 270 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts; 271 272 /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion. 273 SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts; 274 275 /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value. 276 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt; 277 278 /// Keep track of GEPs accessing the same data structures such as structs or 279 /// arrays that are candidates to be split later because of their large 280 /// size. 281 MapVector< 282 AssertingVH<Value>, 283 SmallVector<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>, 32>> 284 LargeOffsetGEPMap; 285 286 /// Keep track of new GEP base after splitting the GEPs having large offset. 287 SmallSet<AssertingVH<Value>, 2> NewGEPBases; 288 289 /// Map serial numbers to Large offset GEPs. 290 DenseMap<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int> LargeOffsetGEPID; 291 292 /// Keep track of SExt promoted. 293 ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses; 294 295 /// True if CFG is modified in any way. 296 bool ModifiedDT; 297 298 /// True if optimizing for size. 299 bool OptSize; 300 301 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed. 302 const DataLayout *DL = nullptr; 303 304 public: 305 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid 306 307 CodeGenPrepare() : FunctionPass(ID) { 308 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry()); 309 } 310 311 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override; 312 313 StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; } 314 315 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override { 316 // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree. 317 AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>(); 318 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>(); 319 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>(); 320 AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>(); 321 } 322 323 private: 324 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F); 325 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F); 326 BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 327 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const; 328 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 329 bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB, 330 bool isPreheader); 331 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT); 332 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT); 333 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 334 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace); 335 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS); 336 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT); 337 bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I); 338 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I); 339 bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load); 340 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI); 341 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI); 342 bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI); 343 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst); 344 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB); 345 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F); 346 bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, 347 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted); 348 bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 349 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 350 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 351 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0); 352 bool mergeSExts(Function &F); 353 bool splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 354 bool performAddressTypePromotion( 355 Instruction *&Inst, 356 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 357 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 358 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts); 359 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F); 360 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I); 361 }; 362 363 } // end anonymous namespace 364 365 char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0; 366 367 INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 368 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 369 INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass) 370 INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 371 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 372 373 FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); } 374 375 bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) { 376 if (skipFunction(F)) 377 return false; 378 379 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout(); 380 381 bool EverMadeChange = false; 382 // Clear per function information. 383 InsertedInsts.clear(); 384 PromotedInsts.clear(); 385 386 ModifiedDT = false; 387 if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) { 388 TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>(); 389 SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F); 390 TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering(); 391 TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo(); 392 } 393 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI(); 394 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F); 395 LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo(); 396 BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, *LI)); 397 BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, *LI)); 398 OptSize = F.optForSize(); 399 400 ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI = 401 getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI(); 402 if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) { 403 if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 404 F.setSectionPrefix(".hot"); 405 else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 406 F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely"); 407 } 408 409 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be 410 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide. 411 if (!OptSize && !PSI->hasHugeWorkingSetSize() && TLI && 412 TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) { 413 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths = 414 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths(); 415 BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin(); 416 while (BB != nullptr) { 417 // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the 418 // optimization to those blocks. 419 BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode(); 420 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths); 421 BB = Next; 422 } 423 } 424 425 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an 426 // unconditional branch. 427 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F); 428 429 if (!DisableBranchOpts) 430 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F); 431 432 // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch, 433 // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges. 434 EverMadeChange |= SplitIndirectBrCriticalEdges(F); 435 436 bool MadeChange = true; 437 while (MadeChange) { 438 MadeChange = false; 439 SeenChainsForSExt.clear(); 440 ValToSExtendedUses.clear(); 441 RemovedInsts.clear(); 442 LargeOffsetGEPMap.clear(); 443 LargeOffsetGEPID.clear(); 444 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) { 445 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++; 446 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false; 447 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration); 448 449 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed 450 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration) 451 break; 452 } 453 if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty()) 454 MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F); 455 if (!LargeOffsetGEPMap.empty()) 456 MadeChange |= splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 457 458 // Really free removed instructions during promotion. 459 for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts) 460 I->deleteValue(); 461 462 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 463 } 464 465 SunkAddrs.clear(); 466 467 if (!DisableBranchOpts) { 468 MadeChange = false; 469 // Use a set vector to get deterministic iteration order. The order the 470 // blocks are removed may affect whether or not PHI nodes in successors 471 // are removed. 472 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList; 473 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 474 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB)); 475 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true); 476 if (!MadeChange) continue; 477 478 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 479 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 480 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 481 WorkList.insert(*II); 482 } 483 484 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors. 485 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty(); 486 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 487 BasicBlock *BB = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 488 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB)); 489 490 DeleteDeadBlock(BB); 491 492 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 493 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 494 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 495 WorkList.insert(*II); 496 } 497 498 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by 499 // a single edge. 500 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange) 501 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F); 502 503 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 504 } 505 506 if (!DisableGCOpts) { 507 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints; 508 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) 509 for (Instruction &I : BB) 510 if (isStatepoint(I)) 511 Statepoints.push_back(&I); 512 for (auto &I : Statepoints) 513 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I); 514 } 515 516 // Do this last to clean up use-before-def scenarios introduced by other 517 // preparatory transforms. 518 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F); 519 520 return EverMadeChange; 521 } 522 523 /// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the 524 /// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block, 525 /// which has a single predecessor. 526 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) { 527 bool Changed = false; 528 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block. 529 // Use a temporary array to avoid iterator being invalidated when 530 // deleting blocks. 531 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 532 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 533 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 534 535 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 536 auto *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 537 if (!BB) 538 continue; 539 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial 540 // edge, just collapse it. 541 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor(); 542 543 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken. 544 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue; 545 546 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator()); 547 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) { 548 Changed = true; 549 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n" << *BB << "\n\n\n"); 550 551 // Merge BB into SinglePred and delete it. 552 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB); 553 } 554 } 555 return Changed; 556 } 557 558 /// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block. 559 BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 560 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it. 561 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 562 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional()) 563 return nullptr; 564 565 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi 566 // node, then other stuff is happening here. 567 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator(); 568 if (BBI != BB->begin()) { 569 --BBI; 570 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) { 571 if (BBI == BB->begin()) 572 break; 573 --BBI; 574 } 575 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI)) 576 return nullptr; 577 } 578 579 // Do not break infinite loops. 580 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 581 if (DestBB == BB) 582 return nullptr; 583 584 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB)) 585 DestBB = nullptr; 586 587 return DestBB; 588 } 589 590 /// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an 591 /// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split 592 /// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these 593 /// blocks so we can split them the way we want them. 594 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) { 595 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders; 596 SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end()); 597 while (!LoopList.empty()) { 598 Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val(); 599 LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end()); 600 if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader()) 601 Preheaders.insert(Preheader); 602 } 603 604 bool MadeChange = false; 605 // Copy blocks into a temporary array to avoid iterator invalidation issues 606 // as we remove them. 607 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block. 608 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 609 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 610 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 611 612 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 613 BasicBlock *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 614 if (!BB) 615 continue; 616 BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB); 617 if (!DestBB || 618 !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB))) 619 continue; 620 621 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB); 622 MadeChange = true; 623 } 624 return MadeChange; 625 } 626 627 bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, 628 BasicBlock *DestBB, 629 bool isPreheader) { 630 // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge. 631 // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the 632 // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be 633 // spilled in the loop body instead. 634 if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader && 635 !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() && 636 BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor())) 637 return false; 638 639 // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a 640 // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block 641 // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to 642 // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not 643 // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be 644 // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping 645 // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the 646 // predecessor of BB. 647 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor(); 648 if (!Pred || 649 !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) || 650 isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))) 651 return true; 652 653 if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) 654 return true; 655 656 // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is 657 // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of 658 // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the 659 // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and 660 // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy). 661 // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to : 662 // Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2. 663 // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming 664 // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such 665 // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies. 666 667 if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin())) 668 return true; 669 670 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs; 671 672 // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in 673 // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB. 674 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E; 675 ++PI) { 676 BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI; 677 if (DestBBPred == BB) 678 continue; 679 680 if (llvm::all_of(DestBB->phis(), [&](const PHINode &DestPN) { 681 return DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == 682 DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred); 683 })) 684 SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred); 685 } 686 687 // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this 688 // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in 689 // Pred already. 690 if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred)) 691 return true; 692 693 BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred); 694 BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB); 695 696 for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs) 697 if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred && 698 DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB)) 699 BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB); 700 701 return PredFreq.getFrequency() <= 702 BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge; 703 } 704 705 /// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single 706 /// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi 707 /// instructions. 708 bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, 709 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const { 710 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in 711 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders), 712 // don't mess around with them. 713 for (const PHINode &PN : BB->phis()) { 714 for (const User *U : PN.users()) { 715 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 716 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI)) 717 return false; 718 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check 719 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is 720 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here. 721 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) { 722 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI)) 723 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 724 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I)); 725 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB && 726 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I)) 727 return false; 728 } 729 } 730 } 731 } 732 733 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB 734 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we 735 // can't merge the block. 736 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()); 737 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict. 738 739 // Collect the preds of BB. 740 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds; 741 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 742 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator. 743 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 744 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 745 } else { 746 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); 747 } 748 749 // Walk the preds of DestBB. 750 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) { 751 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i); 752 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor? 753 for (const PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 754 const Value *V1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 755 const Value *V2 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); 756 757 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be. 758 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2)) 759 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB) 760 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 761 762 // If there is a conflict, bail out. 763 if (V1 != V2) return false; 764 } 765 } 766 } 767 768 return true; 769 } 770 771 /// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in 772 /// it. 773 void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 774 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 775 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 776 777 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" 778 << *BB << *DestBB); 779 780 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge, 781 // just collapse it. 782 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) { 783 if (SinglePred != DestBB) { 784 assert(SinglePred == BB && 785 "Single predecessor not the same as predecessor"); 786 // Merge DestBB into SinglePred/BB and delete it. 787 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(DestBB); 788 // Note: BB(=SinglePred) will not be deleted on this path. 789 // DestBB(=its single successor) is the one that was deleted. 790 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *SinglePred << "\n\n\n"); 791 return; 792 } 793 } 794 795 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB 796 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have. 797 for (PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 798 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it. 799 Value *InVal = PN.removeIncomingValue(BB, false); 800 801 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some 802 // value that dominates BB. 803 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal); 804 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) { 805 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi. 806 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 807 PN.addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i), 808 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i)); 809 } else { 810 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that 811 // we will be adding. 812 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 813 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 814 PN.addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 815 } else { 816 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) 817 PN.addIncoming(InVal, *PI); 818 } 819 } 820 } 821 822 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use 823 // DestBB and remove BB. 824 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB); 825 BB->eraseFromParent(); 826 ++NumBlocksElim; 827 828 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n"); 829 } 830 831 // Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding 832 // derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls 833 static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap( 834 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls, 835 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> 836 &RelocateInstMap) { 837 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object 838 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding 839 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls 840 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap; 841 for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) { 842 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(), 843 ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex()); 844 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate)); 845 } 846 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) { 847 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first; 848 if (Key.first == Key.second) 849 // Base relocation: nothing to insert 850 continue; 851 852 GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second; 853 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first); 854 855 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it. 856 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey); 857 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end()) 858 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off 859 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates. 860 continue; 861 862 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I); 863 } 864 } 865 866 // Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all 867 // small integer constants 868 static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP, 869 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) { 870 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) { 871 // Only accept small constant integer operands 872 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i)); 873 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20) 874 return false; 875 } 876 877 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) 878 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i)); 879 return true; 880 } 881 882 // Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to 883 // replace, computes a replacement, and affects it. 884 static bool 885 simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase, 886 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) { 887 bool MadeChange = false; 888 // We must ensure the relocation of derived pointer is defined after 889 // relocation of base pointer. If we find a relocation corresponding to base 890 // defined earlier than relocation of base then we move relocation of base 891 // right before found relocation. We consider only relocation in the same 892 // basic block as relocation of base. Relocations from other basic block will 893 // be skipped by optimization and we do not care about them. 894 for (auto R = RelocatedBase->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt(); 895 &*R != RelocatedBase; ++R) 896 if (auto RI = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(R)) 897 if (RI->getStatepoint() == RelocatedBase->getStatepoint()) 898 if (RI->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex()) { 899 RelocatedBase->moveBefore(RI); 900 break; 901 } 902 903 for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) { 904 assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() && 905 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object"); 906 if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) { 907 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates. 908 continue; 909 } 910 911 if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) { 912 // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks. 913 // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived 914 // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance 915 // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation. 916 continue; 917 } 918 919 Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr(); 920 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr()); 921 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base) 922 continue; 923 924 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV; 925 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV)) 926 continue; 927 928 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep 929 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() && 930 "Should always have one since it's not a terminator"); 931 932 // Insert after RelocatedBase 933 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode()); 934 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc()); 935 936 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type. 937 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not 938 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be 939 // cases like this: 940 // bb1: 941 // ... 942 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 943 // br label %merge 944 // 945 // bb2: 946 // ... 947 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 948 // br label %merge 949 // 950 // merge: 951 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ] 952 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)* 953 // 954 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast 955 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and 956 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes. 957 Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase; 958 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) { 959 ActualRelocatedBase = 960 Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType()); 961 } 962 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP( 963 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV)); 964 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace); 965 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived 966 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above. 967 Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement; 968 if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) { 969 ActualReplacement = 970 Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType()); 971 } 972 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement); 973 ToReplace->eraseFromParent(); 974 975 MadeChange = true; 976 } 977 return MadeChange; 978 } 979 980 // Turns this: 981 // 982 // %base = ... 983 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 984 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 985 // %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 986 // %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5) 987 // %val = load %ptr' 988 // 989 // into this: 990 // 991 // %base = ... 992 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 993 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 994 // %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 995 // %ptr' = gep %base' + 15 996 // %val = load %ptr' 997 bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) { 998 bool MadeChange = false; 999 SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls; 1000 1001 for (auto *U : I.users()) 1002 if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U)) 1003 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint 1004 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate); 1005 1006 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer 1007 // relocation to mangle 1008 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2) 1009 return false; 1010 1011 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the 1012 // corresponding derived relocate instructions 1013 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap; 1014 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap); 1015 if (RelocateInstMap.empty()) 1016 return false; 1017 1018 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap) 1019 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against 1020 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace 1021 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second); 1022 return MadeChange; 1023 } 1024 1025 /// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks 1026 static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) { 1027 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent(); 1028 1029 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once. 1030 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts; 1031 1032 bool MadeChange = false; 1033 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end(); 1034 UI != E; ) { 1035 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1036 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1037 1038 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the 1039 // appropriate predecessor block. 1040 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1041 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) { 1042 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse); 1043 } 1044 1045 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1046 ++UI; 1047 1048 // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the 1049 // pad. If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad. 1050 if (User->isEHPad()) 1051 continue; 1052 1053 // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not 1054 // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the 1055 // cast. 1056 if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 1057 continue; 1058 1059 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast. 1060 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1061 1062 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it. 1063 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB]; 1064 1065 if (!InsertedCast) { 1066 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1067 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1068 InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0), 1069 CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 1070 InsertedCast->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc()); 1071 } 1072 1073 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast. 1074 TheUse = InsertedCast; 1075 MadeChange = true; 1076 ++NumCastUses; 1077 } 1078 1079 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast. 1080 if (CI->use_empty()) { 1081 salvageDebugInfo(*CI); 1082 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1083 MadeChange = true; 1084 } 1085 1086 return MadeChange; 1087 } 1088 1089 /// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from 1090 /// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to 1091 /// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced. 1092 /// 1093 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1094 static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1095 const DataLayout &DL) { 1096 // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts. This is a weaker condition 1097 // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms. 1098 if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) { 1099 if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(), 1100 ASC->getDestAddressSpace())) 1101 return false; 1102 } 1103 1104 // If this is a noop copy, 1105 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType()); 1106 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType()); 1107 1108 // This is an fp<->int conversion? 1109 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger()) 1110 return false; 1111 1112 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which 1113 // isn't a noop. 1114 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false; 1115 1116 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted 1117 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they 1118 // are. 1119 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) == 1120 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1121 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT); 1122 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) == 1123 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1124 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT); 1125 1126 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy. 1127 if (SrcVT != DstVT) 1128 return false; 1129 1130 return SinkCast(CI); 1131 } 1132 1133 /// Try to combine CI into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if 1134 /// possible. 1135 /// 1136 /// Return true if any changes were made. 1137 static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) { 1138 Value *A, *B; 1139 Instruction *AddI; 1140 if (!match(CI, 1141 m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI)))) 1142 return false; 1143 1144 Type *Ty = AddI->getType(); 1145 if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty)) 1146 return false; 1147 1148 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we 1149 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic 1150 // block containing the icmp: 1151 1152 if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse()) 1153 return false; 1154 1155 #ifndef NDEBUG 1156 // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption 1157 // for now: 1158 if (AddI->hasOneUse()) 1159 assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!"); 1160 #endif 1161 1162 Module *M = CI->getModule(); 1163 Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty); 1164 1165 auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI; 1166 1167 DebugLoc Loc = CI->getDebugLoc(); 1168 auto *UAddWithOverflow = 1169 CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt); 1170 UAddWithOverflow->setDebugLoc(Loc); 1171 auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt); 1172 UAdd->setDebugLoc(Loc); 1173 auto *Overflow = 1174 ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt); 1175 Overflow->setDebugLoc(Loc); 1176 1177 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow); 1178 AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd); 1179 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1180 AddI->eraseFromParent(); 1181 return true; 1182 } 1183 1184 /// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual 1185 /// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on 1186 /// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might 1187 /// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there. 1188 /// 1189 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1190 static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) { 1191 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent(); 1192 1193 // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop. 1194 if (TLI && TLI->useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(CI)) 1195 return false; 1196 1197 // Only insert a cmp in each block once. 1198 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps; 1199 1200 bool MadeChange = false; 1201 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end(); 1202 UI != E; ) { 1203 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1204 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1205 1206 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1207 ++UI; 1208 1209 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1210 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1211 continue; 1212 1213 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in. 1214 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1215 1216 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp. 1217 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1218 1219 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it. 1220 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB]; 1221 1222 if (!InsertedCmp) { 1223 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1224 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1225 InsertedCmp = 1226 CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getPredicate(), 1227 CI->getOperand(0), CI->getOperand(1), "", &*InsertPt); 1228 // Propagate the debug info. 1229 InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc()); 1230 } 1231 1232 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp. 1233 TheUse = InsertedCmp; 1234 MadeChange = true; 1235 ++NumCmpUses; 1236 } 1237 1238 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp. 1239 if (CI->use_empty()) { 1240 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1241 MadeChange = true; 1242 } 1243 1244 return MadeChange; 1245 } 1246 1247 static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) { 1248 if (SinkCmpExpression(CI, TLI)) 1249 return true; 1250 1251 if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI)) 1252 return true; 1253 1254 return false; 1255 } 1256 1257 /// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is 1258 /// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where 1259 /// this operation can be combined. 1260 /// 1261 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1262 static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI, 1263 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1264 SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) { 1265 // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was 1266 // already optimized by some other part of this pass. 1267 assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) && 1268 "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction"); 1269 (void) InsertedInsts; 1270 1271 // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block. 1272 if (AndI->hasOneUse() && 1273 AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent()) 1274 return false; 1275 1276 // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register 1277 // pressure. 1278 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) && 1279 !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) && 1280 AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse()) 1281 return false; 1282 1283 for (auto *U : AndI->users()) { 1284 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U); 1285 1286 // Only sink for and mask feeding icmp with 0. 1287 if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User)) 1288 return false; 1289 1290 auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)); 1291 if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero()) 1292 return false; 1293 } 1294 1295 if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI)) 1296 return false; 1297 1298 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n"); 1299 LLVM_DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump()); 1300 1301 // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0. There should only be 1302 // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any 1303 // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into. 1304 for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end(); 1305 UI != E; ) { 1306 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1307 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1308 1309 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1310 ++UI; 1311 1312 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n"); 1313 1314 // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block. 1315 Instruction *InsertPt = 1316 User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User; 1317 Instruction *InsertedAnd = 1318 BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0), 1319 AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt); 1320 // Propagate the debug info. 1321 InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc()); 1322 1323 // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'. 1324 TheUse = InsertedAnd; 1325 ++NumAndUses; 1326 LLVM_DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump()); 1327 } 1328 1329 // We removed all uses, nuke the and. 1330 AndI->eraseFromParent(); 1331 return true; 1332 } 1333 1334 /// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which 1335 /// includes: 1336 /// 1. Truncate instruction 1337 /// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits: 1338 /// imm & (imm+1) == 0 1339 static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) { 1340 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) { 1341 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And || 1342 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))) 1343 return false; 1344 1345 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue(); 1346 1347 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue()) 1348 return false; 1349 } 1350 return true; 1351 } 1352 1353 /// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB. 1354 static bool 1355 SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI, 1356 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts, 1357 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) { 1358 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1359 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs; 1360 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User); 1361 bool MadeChange = false; 1362 1363 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(), 1364 TruncE = TruncI->user_end(); 1365 TruncUI != TruncE;) { 1366 1367 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse(); 1368 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI); 1369 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1370 1371 ++TruncUI; 1372 1373 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode()); 1374 if (!ISDOpcode) 1375 continue; 1376 1377 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an 1378 // implicit truncate. 1379 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an 1380 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the 1381 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though. 1382 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 1383 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true))) 1384 continue; 1385 1386 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1387 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser)) 1388 continue; 1389 1390 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent(); 1391 1392 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB) 1393 continue; 1394 1395 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB]; 1396 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB]; 1397 1398 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) { 1399 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1400 assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1401 // Sink the shift 1402 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1403 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1404 "", &*InsertPt); 1405 else 1406 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1407 "", &*InsertPt); 1408 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1409 1410 // Sink the trunc 1411 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1412 TruncInsertPt++; 1413 assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1414 1415 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift, 1416 TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt); 1417 InsertedTrunc->setDebugLoc(TruncI->getDebugLoc()); 1418 1419 MadeChange = true; 1420 1421 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc; 1422 } 1423 } 1424 return MadeChange; 1425 } 1426 1427 /// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could 1428 /// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract 1429 /// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract 1430 /// instruction. Here is an example: 1431 /// BB1: 1432 /// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1433 /// BB2: 1434 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16 1435 /// ==> 1436 /// 1437 /// BB2: 1438 /// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1439 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16 1440 /// 1441 /// CodeGen will recognize the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract 1442 /// instruction. 1443 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1444 static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI, 1445 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1446 const DataLayout &DL) { 1447 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent(); 1448 1449 /// Only insert instructions in each block once. 1450 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts; 1451 1452 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType())); 1453 1454 bool MadeChange = false; 1455 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end(); 1456 UI != E;) { 1457 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1458 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1459 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1460 ++UI; 1461 1462 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1463 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1464 continue; 1465 1466 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User)) 1467 continue; 1468 1469 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1470 1471 if (UserBB == DefBB) { 1472 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of 1473 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not 1474 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate 1475 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse. 1476 // for example: 1477 // BB1: 1478 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm 1479 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16 1480 // 1481 // BB2: 1482 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does 1483 // not have i16 compare. 1484 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2 1485 // 1486 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal 1487 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no truncate will be 1488 // introduced in other basic blocks. 1489 && 1490 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType())))) 1491 MadeChange = 1492 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL); 1493 1494 continue; 1495 } 1496 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it. 1497 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB]; 1498 1499 if (!InsertedShift) { 1500 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1501 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1502 1503 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1504 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1505 "", &*InsertPt); 1506 else 1507 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1508 "", &*InsertPt); 1509 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1510 1511 MadeChange = true; 1512 } 1513 1514 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift. 1515 TheUse = InsertedShift; 1516 } 1517 1518 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift. 1519 if (ShiftI->use_empty()) { 1520 salvageDebugInfo(*ShiftI); 1521 ShiftI->eraseFromParent(); 1522 } 1523 1524 return MadeChange; 1525 } 1526 1527 /// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero 1528 /// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic. 1529 /// 1530 /// We want to transform: 1531 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false) 1532 /// 1533 /// into: 1534 /// entry: 1535 /// %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0 1536 /// br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false 1537 /// cond.false: 1538 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true) 1539 /// br label %cond.end 1540 /// cond.end: 1541 /// %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ] 1542 /// 1543 /// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true. 1544 static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros, 1545 const TargetLowering *TLI, 1546 const DataLayout *DL, 1547 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1548 if (!TLI || !DL) 1549 return false; 1550 1551 // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that. 1552 if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One())) 1553 return false; 1554 1555 // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do. 1556 auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID(); 1557 if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) || 1558 (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz())) 1559 return false; 1560 1561 // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work. 1562 Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType(); 1563 unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits(); 1564 if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits()) 1565 return false; 1566 1567 // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch. 1568 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent(); 1569 BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false"); 1570 1571 // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added 1572 // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width 1573 // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero. 1574 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros)); 1575 BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end"); 1576 1577 // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI. 1578 IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext()); 1579 Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator()); 1580 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc()); 1581 1582 // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with 1583 // a compare against zero and a conditional branch. 1584 Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty); 1585 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz"); 1586 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock); 1587 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 1588 1589 // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic 1590 // or the bit width of the operand. 1591 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front()); 1592 PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz"); 1593 CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 1594 Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits)); 1595 PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock); 1596 PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock); 1597 1598 // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's 1599 // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the 1600 // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined. 1601 CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue()); 1602 ModifiedDT = true; 1603 return true; 1604 } 1605 1606 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1607 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent(); 1608 1609 // Lower inline assembly if we can. 1610 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to 1611 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now. 1612 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) { 1613 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) { 1614 // Avoid invalidating the iterator. 1615 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 1616 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause 1617 // reuse before a value is defined. 1618 SunkAddrs.clear(); 1619 return true; 1620 } 1621 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block. 1622 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI)) 1623 return true; 1624 } 1625 1626 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good 1627 // idea 1628 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign; 1629 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) { 1630 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1631 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and 1632 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes 1633 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and 1634 // if size - offset meets the size threshold. 1635 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1636 continue; 1637 APInt Offset(DL->getIndexSizeInBits( 1638 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()), 1639 0); 1640 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset); 1641 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue(); 1642 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0) 1643 continue; 1644 AllocaInst *AI; 1645 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign && 1646 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2) 1647 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1648 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this 1649 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and 1650 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is 1651 // forbidden. 1652 GlobalVariable *GV; 1653 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() && 1654 GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign && 1655 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >= 1656 MinSize + Offset2) 1657 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1658 } 1659 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the 1660 // alignment 1661 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) { 1662 unsigned DestAlign = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL); 1663 if (DestAlign > MI->getDestAlignment()) 1664 MI->setDestAlignment(DestAlign); 1665 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI)) { 1666 unsigned SrcAlign = getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL); 1667 if (SrcAlign > MTI->getSourceAlignment()) 1668 MTI->setSourceAlignment(SrcAlign); 1669 } 1670 } 1671 } 1672 1673 // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the 1674 // cold block. This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to 1675 // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation 1676 // into their uses. TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data 1677 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 1678 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1679 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1680 continue; 1681 unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1682 return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS); 1683 } 1684 1685 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI); 1686 if (II) { 1687 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) { 1688 default: break; 1689 case Intrinsic::objectsize: { 1690 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.* 1691 ConstantInt *RetVal = 1692 lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true); 1693 // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can 1694 // invalidate our iterator. Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case 1695 // this 1696 // happens. 1697 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 1698 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 1699 1700 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1701 1702 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 1703 // start of the block. 1704 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 1705 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 1706 SunkAddrs.clear(); 1707 } 1708 return true; 1709 } 1710 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr: 1711 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: { 1712 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0)); 1713 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() || 1714 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent()) 1715 return false; 1716 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it. 1717 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI); 1718 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 1719 // optimizations don't touch it. 1720 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal); 1721 return true; 1722 } 1723 case Intrinsic::launder_invariant_group: 1724 case Intrinsic::strip_invariant_group: 1725 II->replaceAllUsesWith(II->getArgOperand(0)); 1726 II->eraseFromParent(); 1727 return true; 1728 1729 case Intrinsic::cttz: 1730 case Intrinsic::ctlz: 1731 // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it. 1732 return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT); 1733 } 1734 1735 if (TLI) { 1736 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps; 1737 Type *AccessTy; 1738 if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy)) 1739 while (!PtrOps.empty()) { 1740 Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val(); 1741 unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1742 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS)) 1743 return true; 1744 } 1745 } 1746 } 1747 1748 // From here on out we're working with named functions. 1749 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false; 1750 1751 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar 1752 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls 1753 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default 1754 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone. 1755 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true); 1756 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) { 1757 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 1758 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1759 return true; 1760 } 1761 1762 return false; 1763 } 1764 1765 /// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor 1766 /// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is: 1767 /// @code 1768 /// bb0: 1769 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1770 /// br label %return 1771 /// bb1: 1772 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1773 /// br label %return 1774 /// bb2: 1775 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1776 /// br label %return 1777 /// return: 1778 /// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ] 1779 /// ret i32 %retval 1780 /// @endcode 1781 /// 1782 /// => 1783 /// 1784 /// @code 1785 /// bb0: 1786 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1787 /// ret i32 %tmp0 1788 /// bb1: 1789 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1790 /// ret i32 %tmp1 1791 /// bb2: 1792 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1793 /// ret i32 %tmp2 1794 /// @endcode 1795 bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) { 1796 if (!TLI) 1797 return false; 1798 1799 ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 1800 if (!RetI) 1801 return false; 1802 1803 PHINode *PN = nullptr; 1804 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr; 1805 Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue(); 1806 if (V) { 1807 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V); 1808 if (BCI) 1809 V = BCI->getOperand(0); 1810 1811 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V); 1812 if (!PN) 1813 return false; 1814 } 1815 1816 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB) 1817 return false; 1818 1819 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the 1820 // return is the first instruction in the block. 1821 if (PN) { 1822 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 1823 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)); 1824 if (&*BI == BCI) 1825 // Also skip over the bitcast. 1826 ++BI; 1827 if (&*BI != RetI) 1828 return false; 1829 } else { 1830 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 1831 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI; 1832 if (&*BI != RetI) 1833 return false; 1834 } 1835 1836 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail 1837 /// call. 1838 const Function *F = BB->getParent(); 1839 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls; 1840 if (PN) { 1841 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 1842 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I)); 1843 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call. 1844 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) && 1845 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 1846 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 1847 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 1848 } 1849 } else { 1850 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs; 1851 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) { 1852 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second) 1853 continue; 1854 1855 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList(); 1856 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin(); 1857 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend(); 1858 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI)); 1859 if (RI == RE) 1860 continue; 1861 1862 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI); 1863 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 1864 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 1865 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 1866 } 1867 } 1868 1869 bool Changed = false; 1870 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) { 1871 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i]; 1872 CallSite CS(CI); 1873 1874 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to 1875 // the return block. 1876 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent(); 1877 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator()); 1878 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB) 1879 continue; 1880 1881 // Duplicate the return into CallBB. 1882 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB); 1883 ModifiedDT = Changed = true; 1884 ++NumRetsDup; 1885 } 1886 1887 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now. 1888 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB)) 1889 BB->eraseFromParent(); 1890 1891 return Changed; 1892 } 1893 1894 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1895 // Memory Optimization 1896 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 1897 1898 namespace { 1899 1900 /// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode 1901 /// which holds actual Value*'s for register values. 1902 struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode { 1903 Value *BaseReg = nullptr; 1904 Value *ScaledReg = nullptr; 1905 Value *OriginalValue = nullptr; 1906 1907 enum FieldName { 1908 NoField = 0x00, 1909 BaseRegField = 0x01, 1910 BaseGVField = 0x02, 1911 BaseOffsField = 0x04, 1912 ScaledRegField = 0x08, 1913 ScaleField = 0x10, 1914 MultipleFields = 0xff 1915 }; 1916 1917 ExtAddrMode() = default; 1918 1919 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const; 1920 void dump() const; 1921 1922 FieldName compare(const ExtAddrMode &other) { 1923 // First check that the types are the same on each field, as differing types 1924 // is something we can't cope with later on. 1925 if (BaseReg && other.BaseReg && 1926 BaseReg->getType() != other.BaseReg->getType()) 1927 return MultipleFields; 1928 if (BaseGV && other.BaseGV && 1929 BaseGV->getType() != other.BaseGV->getType()) 1930 return MultipleFields; 1931 if (ScaledReg && other.ScaledReg && 1932 ScaledReg->getType() != other.ScaledReg->getType()) 1933 return MultipleFields; 1934 1935 // Check each field to see if it differs. 1936 unsigned Result = NoField; 1937 if (BaseReg != other.BaseReg) 1938 Result |= BaseRegField; 1939 if (BaseGV != other.BaseGV) 1940 Result |= BaseGVField; 1941 if (BaseOffs != other.BaseOffs) 1942 Result |= BaseOffsField; 1943 if (ScaledReg != other.ScaledReg) 1944 Result |= ScaledRegField; 1945 // Don't count 0 as being a different scale, because that actually means 1946 // unscaled (which will already be counted by having no ScaledReg). 1947 if (Scale && other.Scale && Scale != other.Scale) 1948 Result |= ScaleField; 1949 1950 if (countPopulation(Result) > 1) 1951 return MultipleFields; 1952 else 1953 return static_cast<FieldName>(Result); 1954 } 1955 1956 // An AddrMode is trivial if it involves no calculation i.e. it is just a base 1957 // with no offset. 1958 bool isTrivial() { 1959 // An AddrMode is (BaseGV + BaseReg + BaseOffs + ScaleReg * Scale) so it is 1960 // trivial if at most one of these terms is nonzero, except that BaseGV and 1961 // BaseReg both being zero actually means a null pointer value, which we 1962 // consider to be 'non-zero' here. 1963 return !BaseOffs && !Scale && !(BaseGV && BaseReg); 1964 } 1965 1966 Value *GetFieldAsValue(FieldName Field, Type *IntPtrTy) { 1967 switch (Field) { 1968 default: 1969 return nullptr; 1970 case BaseRegField: 1971 return BaseReg; 1972 case BaseGVField: 1973 return BaseGV; 1974 case ScaledRegField: 1975 return ScaledReg; 1976 case BaseOffsField: 1977 return ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffs); 1978 } 1979 } 1980 1981 void SetCombinedField(FieldName Field, Value *V, 1982 const SmallVectorImpl<ExtAddrMode> &AddrModes) { 1983 switch (Field) { 1984 default: 1985 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled fields are expected to be rejected earlier"); 1986 break; 1987 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 1988 BaseReg = V; 1989 break; 1990 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 1991 // A combined BaseGV is an Instruction, not a GlobalValue, so it goes 1992 // in the BaseReg field. 1993 assert(BaseReg == nullptr); 1994 BaseReg = V; 1995 BaseGV = nullptr; 1996 break; 1997 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 1998 ScaledReg = V; 1999 // If we have a mix of scaled and unscaled addrmodes then we want scale 2000 // to be the scale and not zero. 2001 if (!Scale) 2002 for (const ExtAddrMode &AM : AddrModes) 2003 if (AM.Scale) { 2004 Scale = AM.Scale; 2005 break; 2006 } 2007 break; 2008 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 2009 // The offset is no longer a constant, so it goes in ScaledReg with a 2010 // scale of 1. 2011 assert(ScaledReg == nullptr); 2012 ScaledReg = V; 2013 Scale = 1; 2014 BaseOffs = 0; 2015 break; 2016 } 2017 } 2018 }; 2019 2020 } // end anonymous namespace 2021 2022 #ifndef NDEBUG 2023 static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) { 2024 AM.print(OS); 2025 return OS; 2026 } 2027 #endif 2028 2029 #if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP) 2030 void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const { 2031 bool NeedPlus = false; 2032 OS << "["; 2033 if (BaseGV) { 2034 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2035 << "GV:"; 2036 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2037 NeedPlus = true; 2038 } 2039 2040 if (BaseOffs) { 2041 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2042 << BaseOffs; 2043 NeedPlus = true; 2044 } 2045 2046 if (BaseReg) { 2047 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2048 << "Base:"; 2049 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2050 NeedPlus = true; 2051 } 2052 if (Scale) { 2053 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2054 << Scale << "*"; 2055 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2056 } 2057 2058 OS << ']'; 2059 } 2060 2061 LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const { 2062 print(dbgs()); 2063 dbgs() << '\n'; 2064 } 2065 #endif 2066 2067 namespace { 2068 2069 /// This class provides transaction based operation on the IR. 2070 /// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and 2071 /// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called. 2072 class TypePromotionTransaction { 2073 /// This represents the common interface of the individual transaction. 2074 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on 2075 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction. 2076 class TypePromotionAction { 2077 protected: 2078 /// The Instruction modified. 2079 Instruction *Inst; 2080 2081 public: 2082 /// Constructor of the action. 2083 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR. 2084 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {} 2085 2086 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() = default; 2087 2088 /// Undo the modification done by this action. 2089 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was 2090 /// before this action was applied. 2091 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same 2092 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied. 2093 virtual void undo() = 0; 2094 2095 /// Advocate every change made by this action. 2096 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important 2097 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever. 2098 virtual void commit() { 2099 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything. 2100 } 2101 }; 2102 2103 /// Utility to remember the position of an instruction. 2104 class InsertionHandler { 2105 /// Position of an instruction. 2106 /// Either an instruction: 2107 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used. 2108 /// - Has a previous instruction: PrevInst is used. 2109 union { 2110 Instruction *PrevInst; 2111 BasicBlock *BB; 2112 } Point; 2113 2114 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction. 2115 bool HasPrevInstruction; 2116 2117 public: 2118 /// Record the position of \p Inst. 2119 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) { 2120 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator(); 2121 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin())); 2122 if (HasPrevInstruction) 2123 Point.PrevInst = &*--It; 2124 else 2125 Point.BB = Inst->getParent(); 2126 } 2127 2128 /// Insert \p Inst at the recorded position. 2129 void insert(Instruction *Inst) { 2130 if (HasPrevInstruction) { 2131 if (Inst->getParent()) 2132 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2133 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst); 2134 } else { 2135 Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 2136 if (Inst->getParent()) 2137 Inst->moveBefore(Position); 2138 else 2139 Inst->insertBefore(Position); 2140 } 2141 } 2142 }; 2143 2144 /// Move an instruction before another. 2145 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction { 2146 /// Original position of the instruction. 2147 InsertionHandler Position; 2148 2149 public: 2150 /// Move \p Inst before \p Before. 2151 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before) 2152 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) { 2153 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before 2154 << "\n"); 2155 Inst->moveBefore(Before); 2156 } 2157 2158 /// Move the instruction back to its original position. 2159 void undo() override { 2160 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2161 Position.insert(Inst); 2162 } 2163 }; 2164 2165 /// Set the operand of an instruction with a new value. 2166 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction { 2167 /// Original operand of the instruction. 2168 Value *Origin; 2169 2170 /// Index of the modified instruction. 2171 unsigned Idx; 2172 2173 public: 2174 /// Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal. 2175 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal) 2176 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) { 2177 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n" 2178 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n" 2179 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n"); 2180 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx); 2181 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal); 2182 } 2183 2184 /// Restore the original value of the instruction. 2185 void undo() override { 2186 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n" 2187 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n" 2188 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n"); 2189 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin); 2190 } 2191 }; 2192 2193 /// Hide the operands of an instruction. 2194 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands. 2195 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction { 2196 /// The list of original operands. 2197 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues; 2198 2199 public: 2200 /// Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst. 2201 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2202 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2203 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands(); 2204 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds); 2205 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) { 2206 // Save the current operand. 2207 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It); 2208 OriginalValues.push_back(Val); 2209 // Set a dummy one. 2210 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead 2211 // that we are not willing to pay. 2212 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType())); 2213 } 2214 } 2215 2216 /// Restore the original list of uses. 2217 void undo() override { 2218 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2219 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It) 2220 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]); 2221 } 2222 }; 2223 2224 /// Build a truncate instruction. 2225 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2226 Value *Val; 2227 2228 public: 2229 /// Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2230 /// result. 2231 /// trunc Opnd to Ty. 2232 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) { 2233 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd); 2234 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2235 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2236 } 2237 2238 /// Get the built value. 2239 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2240 2241 /// Remove the built instruction. 2242 void undo() override { 2243 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2244 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2245 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2246 } 2247 }; 2248 2249 /// Build a sign extension instruction. 2250 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2251 Value *Val; 2252 2253 public: 2254 /// Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2255 /// result. 2256 /// sext Opnd to Ty. 2257 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2258 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2259 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2260 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2261 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2262 } 2263 2264 /// Get the built value. 2265 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2266 2267 /// Remove the built instruction. 2268 void undo() override { 2269 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2270 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2271 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2272 } 2273 }; 2274 2275 /// Build a zero extension instruction. 2276 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2277 Value *Val; 2278 2279 public: 2280 /// Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2281 /// result. 2282 /// zext Opnd to Ty. 2283 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2284 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2285 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2286 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2287 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2288 } 2289 2290 /// Get the built value. 2291 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2292 2293 /// Remove the built instruction. 2294 void undo() override { 2295 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2296 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2297 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2298 } 2299 }; 2300 2301 /// Mutate an instruction to another type. 2302 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction { 2303 /// Record the original type. 2304 Type *OrigTy; 2305 2306 public: 2307 /// Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy. 2308 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) 2309 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) { 2310 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy 2311 << "\n"); 2312 Inst->mutateType(NewTy); 2313 } 2314 2315 /// Mutate the instruction back to its original type. 2316 void undo() override { 2317 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy 2318 << "\n"); 2319 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy); 2320 } 2321 }; 2322 2323 /// Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction. 2324 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction { 2325 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses. 2326 struct InstructionAndIdx { 2327 /// The instruction using the instruction. 2328 Instruction *Inst; 2329 2330 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst. 2331 unsigned Idx; 2332 2333 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx) 2334 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {} 2335 }; 2336 2337 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index). 2338 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses; 2339 2340 using use_iterator = SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator; 2341 2342 public: 2343 /// Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New. 2344 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2345 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New 2346 << "\n"); 2347 // Record the original uses. 2348 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) { 2349 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 2350 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo())); 2351 } 2352 // Now, we can replace the uses. 2353 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New); 2354 } 2355 2356 /// Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst. 2357 void undo() override { 2358 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2359 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(), 2360 EndIt = OriginalUses.end(); 2361 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) { 2362 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst); 2363 } 2364 } 2365 }; 2366 2367 /// Remove an instruction from the IR. 2368 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction { 2369 /// Original position of the instruction. 2370 InsertionHandler Inserter; 2371 2372 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other 2373 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed. 2374 OperandsHider Hider; 2375 2376 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any. 2377 UsesReplacer *Replacer = nullptr; 2378 2379 /// Keep track of instructions removed. 2380 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2381 2382 public: 2383 /// Remove all reference of \p Inst and optionally replace all its 2384 /// uses with New. 2385 /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action. 2386 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr 2387 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts, 2388 Value *New = nullptr) 2389 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst), 2390 RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) { 2391 if (New) 2392 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New); 2393 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2394 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 2395 /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing 2396 /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the 2397 /// removed instructions during promotion. 2398 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2399 } 2400 2401 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; } 2402 2403 /// Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if 2404 /// new value was provided when build this action. 2405 void undo() override { 2406 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2407 Inserter.insert(Inst); 2408 if (Replacer) 2409 Replacer->undo(); 2410 Hider.undo(); 2411 RemovedInsts.erase(Inst); 2412 } 2413 }; 2414 2415 public: 2416 /// Restoration point. 2417 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator 2418 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer. 2419 using ConstRestorationPt = const TypePromotionAction *; 2420 2421 TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts) 2422 : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {} 2423 2424 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction. 2425 void commit(); 2426 2427 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point. 2428 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point); 2429 2430 /// Get the current restoration point. 2431 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const; 2432 2433 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback. 2434 /// @{ 2435 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand. 2436 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal); 2437 2438 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent. 2439 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr); 2440 2441 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith. 2442 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New); 2443 2444 /// Same as Value::mutateType. 2445 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy); 2446 2447 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc. 2448 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2449 2450 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt. 2451 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2452 2453 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt. 2454 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2455 2456 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore. 2457 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before); 2458 /// @} 2459 2460 private: 2461 /// The ordered list of actions made so far. 2462 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions; 2463 2464 using CommitPt = SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator; 2465 2466 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2467 }; 2468 2469 } // end anonymous namespace 2470 2471 void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, 2472 Value *NewVal) { 2473 Actions.push_back(llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>( 2474 Inst, Idx, NewVal)); 2475 } 2476 2477 void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, 2478 Value *NewVal) { 2479 Actions.push_back( 2480 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>( 2481 Inst, RemovedInsts, NewVal)); 2482 } 2483 2484 void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, 2485 Value *New) { 2486 Actions.push_back( 2487 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New)); 2488 } 2489 2490 void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) { 2491 Actions.push_back( 2492 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy)); 2493 } 2494 2495 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, 2496 Type *Ty) { 2497 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty)); 2498 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2499 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2500 return Val; 2501 } 2502 2503 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst, 2504 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2505 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2506 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2507 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2508 return Val; 2509 } 2510 2511 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst, 2512 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2513 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2514 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2515 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2516 return Val; 2517 } 2518 2519 void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, 2520 Instruction *Before) { 2521 Actions.push_back( 2522 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>( 2523 Inst, Before)); 2524 } 2525 2526 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt 2527 TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const { 2528 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr; 2529 } 2530 2531 void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() { 2532 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt; 2533 ++It) 2534 (*It)->commit(); 2535 Actions.clear(); 2536 } 2537 2538 void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback( 2539 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) { 2540 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) { 2541 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val(); 2542 Curr->undo(); 2543 } 2544 } 2545 2546 namespace { 2547 2548 /// A helper class for matching addressing modes. 2549 /// 2550 /// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes. 2551 class AddressingModeMatcher { 2552 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts; 2553 const TargetLowering &TLI; 2554 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI; 2555 const DataLayout &DL; 2556 2557 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and 2558 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for. 2559 Type *AccessTy; 2560 unsigned AddrSpace; 2561 Instruction *MemoryInst; 2562 2563 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is 2564 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff. 2565 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode; 2566 2567 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. 2568 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts; 2569 2570 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion. 2571 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts; 2572 2573 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2574 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT; 2575 2576 // A GEP which has too large offset to be folded into the addressing mode. 2577 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP; 2578 2579 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks. 2580 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true. 2581 bool IgnoreProfitability; 2582 2583 AddressingModeMatcher( 2584 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 2585 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, Type *AT, unsigned AS, Instruction *MI, 2586 ExtAddrMode &AM, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 2587 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2588 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) 2589 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI), 2590 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS), 2591 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts), 2592 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT), LargeOffsetGEP(LargeOffsetGEP) { 2593 IgnoreProfitability = false; 2594 } 2595 2596 public: 2597 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold, 2598 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved 2599 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts. 2600 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare 2601 /// optimizations. 2602 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 2603 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2604 static ExtAddrMode 2605 Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS, Instruction *MemoryInst, 2606 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AddrModeInsts, 2607 const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, 2608 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 2609 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2610 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) { 2611 ExtAddrMode Result; 2612 2613 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AccessTy, AS, 2614 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts, 2615 PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP) 2616 .matchAddr(V, 0); 2617 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 2618 return Result; 2619 } 2620 2621 private: 2622 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth); 2623 bool matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth); 2624 bool matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth, 2625 bool *MovedAway = nullptr); 2626 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, 2627 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 2628 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter); 2629 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2); 2630 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, 2631 Value *PromotedOperand) const; 2632 }; 2633 2634 /// Keep track of simplification of Phi nodes. 2635 /// Accept the set of all phi nodes and erase phi node from this set 2636 /// if it is simplified. 2637 class SimplificationTracker { 2638 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> Storage; 2639 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 2640 // Tracks newly created Phi nodes. We use a SetVector to get deterministic 2641 // order when iterating over the set in MatchPhiSet. 2642 SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> AllPhiNodes; 2643 // Tracks newly created Select nodes. 2644 SmallPtrSet<SelectInst *, 32> AllSelectNodes; 2645 2646 public: 2647 SimplificationTracker(const SimplifyQuery &sq) 2648 : SQ(sq) {} 2649 2650 Value *Get(Value *V) { 2651 do { 2652 auto SV = Storage.find(V); 2653 if (SV == Storage.end()) 2654 return V; 2655 V = SV->second; 2656 } while (true); 2657 } 2658 2659 Value *Simplify(Value *Val) { 2660 SmallVector<Value *, 32> WorkList; 2661 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 32> Visited; 2662 WorkList.push_back(Val); 2663 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 2664 auto P = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 2665 if (!Visited.insert(P).second) 2666 continue; 2667 if (auto *PI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(P)) 2668 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(cast<Instruction>(PI), SQ)) { 2669 for (auto *U : PI->users()) 2670 WorkList.push_back(cast<Value>(U)); 2671 Put(PI, V); 2672 PI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 2673 if (auto *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(PI)) 2674 AllPhiNodes.remove(PHI); 2675 if (auto *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(PI)) 2676 AllSelectNodes.erase(Select); 2677 PI->eraseFromParent(); 2678 } 2679 } 2680 return Get(Val); 2681 } 2682 2683 void Put(Value *From, Value *To) { 2684 Storage.insert({ From, To }); 2685 } 2686 2687 void ReplacePhi(PHINode *From, PHINode *To) { 2688 Value* OldReplacement = Get(From); 2689 while (OldReplacement != From) { 2690 From = To; 2691 To = dyn_cast<PHINode>(OldReplacement); 2692 OldReplacement = Get(From); 2693 } 2694 assert(Get(To) == To && "Replacement PHI node is already replaced."); 2695 Put(From, To); 2696 From->replaceAllUsesWith(To); 2697 AllPhiNodes.remove(From); 2698 From->eraseFromParent(); 2699 } 2700 2701 SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32>& newPhiNodes() { return AllPhiNodes; } 2702 2703 void insertNewPhi(PHINode *PN) { AllPhiNodes.insert(PN); } 2704 2705 void insertNewSelect(SelectInst *SI) { AllSelectNodes.insert(SI); } 2706 2707 unsigned countNewPhiNodes() const { return AllPhiNodes.size(); } 2708 2709 unsigned countNewSelectNodes() const { return AllSelectNodes.size(); } 2710 2711 void destroyNewNodes(Type *CommonType) { 2712 // For safe erasing, replace the uses with dummy value first. 2713 auto Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 2714 for (auto I : AllPhiNodes) { 2715 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 2716 I->eraseFromParent(); 2717 } 2718 AllPhiNodes.clear(); 2719 for (auto I : AllSelectNodes) { 2720 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 2721 I->eraseFromParent(); 2722 } 2723 AllSelectNodes.clear(); 2724 } 2725 }; 2726 2727 /// A helper class for combining addressing modes. 2728 class AddressingModeCombiner { 2729 typedef std::pair<Value *, BasicBlock *> ValueInBB; 2730 typedef DenseMap<ValueInBB, Value *> FoldAddrToValueMapping; 2731 typedef std::pair<PHINode *, PHINode *> PHIPair; 2732 2733 private: 2734 /// The addressing modes we've collected. 2735 SmallVector<ExtAddrMode, 16> AddrModes; 2736 2737 /// The field in which the AddrModes differ, when we have more than one. 2738 ExtAddrMode::FieldName DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::NoField; 2739 2740 /// Are the AddrModes that we have all just equal to their original values? 2741 bool AllAddrModesTrivial = true; 2742 2743 /// Common Type for all different fields in addressing modes. 2744 Type *CommonType; 2745 2746 /// SimplifyQuery for simplifyInstruction utility. 2747 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 2748 2749 /// Original Address. 2750 ValueInBB Original; 2751 2752 public: 2753 AddressingModeCombiner(const SimplifyQuery &_SQ, ValueInBB OriginalValue) 2754 : CommonType(nullptr), SQ(_SQ), Original(OriginalValue) {} 2755 2756 /// Get the combined AddrMode 2757 const ExtAddrMode &getAddrMode() const { 2758 return AddrModes[0]; 2759 } 2760 2761 /// Add a new AddrMode if it's compatible with the AddrModes we already 2762 /// have. 2763 /// \return True iff we succeeded in doing so. 2764 bool addNewAddrMode(ExtAddrMode &NewAddrMode) { 2765 // Take note of if we have any non-trivial AddrModes, as we need to detect 2766 // when all AddrModes are trivial as then we would introduce a phi or select 2767 // which just duplicates what's already there. 2768 AllAddrModesTrivial = AllAddrModesTrivial && NewAddrMode.isTrivial(); 2769 2770 // If this is the first addrmode then everything is fine. 2771 if (AddrModes.empty()) { 2772 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 2773 return true; 2774 } 2775 2776 // Figure out how different this is from the other address modes, which we 2777 // can do just by comparing against the first one given that we only care 2778 // about the cumulative difference. 2779 ExtAddrMode::FieldName ThisDifferentField = 2780 AddrModes[0].compare(NewAddrMode); 2781 if (DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 2782 DifferentField = ThisDifferentField; 2783 else if (DifferentField != ThisDifferentField) 2784 DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 2785 2786 // If NewAddrMode differs in more than one dimension we cannot handle it. 2787 bool CanHandle = DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 2788 2789 // If Scale Field is different then we reject. 2790 CanHandle = CanHandle && DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::ScaleField; 2791 2792 // We also must reject the case when base offset is different and 2793 // scale reg is not null, we cannot handle this case due to merge of 2794 // different offsets will be used as ScaleReg. 2795 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField || 2796 !NewAddrMode.ScaledReg); 2797 2798 // We also must reject the case when GV is different and BaseReg installed 2799 // due to we want to use base reg as a merge of GV values. 2800 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField || 2801 !NewAddrMode.HasBaseReg); 2802 2803 // Even if NewAddMode is the same we still need to collect it due to 2804 // original value is different. And later we will need all original values 2805 // as anchors during finding the common Phi node. 2806 if (CanHandle) 2807 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 2808 else 2809 AddrModes.clear(); 2810 2811 return CanHandle; 2812 } 2813 2814 /// Combine the addressing modes we've collected into a single 2815 /// addressing mode. 2816 /// \return True iff we successfully combined them or we only had one so 2817 /// didn't need to combine them anyway. 2818 bool combineAddrModes() { 2819 // If we have no AddrModes then they can't be combined. 2820 if (AddrModes.size() == 0) 2821 return false; 2822 2823 // A single AddrMode can trivially be combined. 2824 if (AddrModes.size() == 1 || DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 2825 return true; 2826 2827 // If the AddrModes we collected are all just equal to the value they are 2828 // derived from then combining them wouldn't do anything useful. 2829 if (AllAddrModesTrivial) 2830 return false; 2831 2832 if (!addrModeCombiningAllowed()) 2833 return false; 2834 2835 // Build a map between <original value, basic block where we saw it> to 2836 // value of base register. 2837 // Bail out if there is no common type. 2838 FoldAddrToValueMapping Map; 2839 if (!initializeMap(Map)) 2840 return false; 2841 2842 Value *CommonValue = findCommon(Map); 2843 if (CommonValue) 2844 AddrModes[0].SetCombinedField(DifferentField, CommonValue, AddrModes); 2845 return CommonValue != nullptr; 2846 } 2847 2848 private: 2849 /// Initialize Map with anchor values. For address seen in some BB 2850 /// we set the value of different field saw in this address. 2851 /// If address is not an instruction than basic block is set to null. 2852 /// At the same time we find a common type for different field we will 2853 /// use to create new Phi/Select nodes. Keep it in CommonType field. 2854 /// Return false if there is no common type found. 2855 bool initializeMap(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 2856 // Keep track of keys where the value is null. We will need to replace it 2857 // with constant null when we know the common type. 2858 SmallVector<ValueInBB, 2> NullValue; 2859 Type *IntPtrTy = SQ.DL.getIntPtrType(AddrModes[0].OriginalValue->getType()); 2860 for (auto &AM : AddrModes) { 2861 BasicBlock *BB = nullptr; 2862 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AM.OriginalValue)) 2863 BB = I->getParent(); 2864 2865 Value *DV = AM.GetFieldAsValue(DifferentField, IntPtrTy); 2866 if (DV) { 2867 auto *Type = DV->getType(); 2868 if (CommonType && CommonType != Type) 2869 return false; 2870 CommonType = Type; 2871 Map[{ AM.OriginalValue, BB }] = DV; 2872 } else { 2873 NullValue.push_back({ AM.OriginalValue, BB }); 2874 } 2875 } 2876 assert(CommonType && "At least one non-null value must be!"); 2877 for (auto VIBB : NullValue) 2878 Map[VIBB] = Constant::getNullValue(CommonType); 2879 return true; 2880 } 2881 2882 /// We have mapping between value A and basic block where value A 2883 /// seen to other value B where B was a field in addressing mode represented 2884 /// by A. Also we have an original value C representing an address in some 2885 /// basic block. Traversing from C through phi and selects we ended up with 2886 /// A's in a map. This utility function tries to find a value V which is a 2887 /// field in addressing mode C and traversing through phi nodes and selects 2888 /// we will end up in corresponded values B in a map. 2889 /// The utility will create a new Phi/Selects if needed. 2890 // The simple example looks as follows: 2891 // BB1: 2892 // p1 = b1 + 40 2893 // br cond BB2, BB3 2894 // BB2: 2895 // p2 = b2 + 40 2896 // br BB3 2897 // BB3: 2898 // p = phi [p1, BB1], [p2, BB2] 2899 // v = load p 2900 // Map is 2901 // <p1, BB1> -> b1 2902 // <p2, BB2> -> b2 2903 // Request is 2904 // <p, BB3> -> ? 2905 // The function tries to find or build phi [b1, BB1], [b2, BB2] in BB3 2906 Value *findCommon(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 2907 // Tracks the simplification of newly created phi nodes. The reason we use 2908 // this mapping is because we will add new created Phi nodes in AddrToBase. 2909 // Simplification of Phi nodes is recursive, so some Phi node may 2910 // be simplified after we added it to AddrToBase. 2911 // Using this mapping we can find the current value in AddrToBase. 2912 SimplificationTracker ST(SQ); 2913 2914 // First step, DFS to create PHI nodes for all intermediate blocks. 2915 // Also fill traverse order for the second step. 2916 SmallVector<ValueInBB, 32> TraverseOrder; 2917 InsertPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 2918 2919 // Second Step, fill new nodes by merged values and simplify if possible. 2920 FillPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 2921 2922 if (!AddrSinkNewSelects && ST.countNewSelectNodes() > 0) { 2923 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 2924 return nullptr; 2925 } 2926 2927 // Now we'd like to match New Phi nodes to existed ones. 2928 unsigned PhiNotMatchedCount = 0; 2929 if (!MatchPhiSet(ST, AddrSinkNewPhis, PhiNotMatchedCount)) { 2930 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 2931 return nullptr; 2932 } 2933 2934 auto *Result = ST.Get(Map.find(Original)->second); 2935 if (Result) { 2936 NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated += ST.countNewPhiNodes() + PhiNotMatchedCount; 2937 NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated += ST.countNewSelectNodes(); 2938 } 2939 return Result; 2940 } 2941 2942 /// Try to match PHI node to Candidate. 2943 /// Matcher tracks the matched Phi nodes. 2944 bool MatchPhiNode(PHINode *PHI, PHINode *Candidate, 2945 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> &Matcher, 2946 SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> &PhiNodesToMatch) { 2947 SmallVector<PHIPair, 8> WorkList; 2948 Matcher.insert({ PHI, Candidate }); 2949 WorkList.push_back({ PHI, Candidate }); 2950 SmallSet<PHIPair, 8> Visited; 2951 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 2952 auto Item = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 2953 if (!Visited.insert(Item).second) 2954 continue; 2955 // We iterate over all incoming values to Phi to compare them. 2956 // If values are different and both of them Phi and the first one is a 2957 // Phi we added (subject to match) and both of them is in the same basic 2958 // block then we can match our pair if values match. So we state that 2959 // these values match and add it to work list to verify that. 2960 for (auto B : Item.first->blocks()) { 2961 Value *FirstValue = Item.first->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 2962 Value *SecondValue = Item.second->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 2963 if (FirstValue == SecondValue) 2964 continue; 2965 2966 PHINode *FirstPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(FirstValue); 2967 PHINode *SecondPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SecondValue); 2968 2969 // One of them is not Phi or 2970 // The first one is not Phi node from the set we'd like to match or 2971 // Phi nodes from different basic blocks then 2972 // we will not be able to match. 2973 if (!FirstPhi || !SecondPhi || !PhiNodesToMatch.count(FirstPhi) || 2974 FirstPhi->getParent() != SecondPhi->getParent()) 2975 return false; 2976 2977 // If we already matched them then continue. 2978 if (Matcher.count({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi })) 2979 continue; 2980 // So the values are different and does not match. So we need them to 2981 // match. 2982 Matcher.insert({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 2983 // But me must check it. 2984 WorkList.push_back({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 2985 } 2986 } 2987 return true; 2988 } 2989 2990 /// For the given set of PHI nodes (in the SimplificationTracker) try 2991 /// to find their equivalents. 2992 /// Returns false if this matching fails and creation of new Phi is disabled. 2993 bool MatchPhiSet(SimplificationTracker &ST, bool AllowNewPhiNodes, 2994 unsigned &PhiNotMatchedCount) { 2995 // Use a SetVector for Matched to make sure we do replacements (ReplacePhi) 2996 // in a deterministic order below. 2997 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> Matched; 2998 SmallPtrSet<PHINode *, 8> WillNotMatch; 2999 SmallSetVector<PHINode *, 32> &PhiNodesToMatch = ST.newPhiNodes(); 3000 while (PhiNodesToMatch.size()) { 3001 PHINode *PHI = *PhiNodesToMatch.begin(); 3002 3003 // Add us, if no Phi nodes in the basic block we do not match. 3004 WillNotMatch.clear(); 3005 WillNotMatch.insert(PHI); 3006 3007 // Traverse all Phis until we found equivalent or fail to do that. 3008 bool IsMatched = false; 3009 for (auto &P : PHI->getParent()->phis()) { 3010 if (&P == PHI) 3011 continue; 3012 if ((IsMatched = MatchPhiNode(PHI, &P, Matched, PhiNodesToMatch))) 3013 break; 3014 // If it does not match, collect all Phi nodes from matcher. 3015 // if we end up with no match, them all these Phi nodes will not match 3016 // later. 3017 for (auto M : Matched) 3018 WillNotMatch.insert(M.first); 3019 Matched.clear(); 3020 } 3021 if (IsMatched) { 3022 // Replace all matched values and erase them. 3023 for (auto MV : Matched) 3024 ST.ReplacePhi(MV.first, MV.second); 3025 Matched.clear(); 3026 continue; 3027 } 3028 // If we are not allowed to create new nodes then bail out. 3029 if (!AllowNewPhiNodes) 3030 return false; 3031 // Just remove all seen values in matcher. They will not match anything. 3032 PhiNotMatchedCount += WillNotMatch.size(); 3033 for (auto *P : WillNotMatch) 3034 PhiNodesToMatch.remove(P); 3035 } 3036 return true; 3037 } 3038 /// Fill the placeholder with values from predecessors and simplify it. 3039 void FillPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3040 SmallVectorImpl<ValueInBB> &TraverseOrder, 3041 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3042 while (!TraverseOrder.empty()) { 3043 auto Current = TraverseOrder.pop_back_val(); 3044 assert(Map.find(Current) != Map.end() && "No node to fill!!!"); 3045 Value *CurrentValue = Current.first; 3046 BasicBlock *CurrentBlock = Current.second; 3047 Value *V = Map[Current]; 3048 3049 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 3050 // CurrentValue also must be Select. 3051 auto *CurrentSelect = cast<SelectInst>(CurrentValue); 3052 auto *TrueValue = CurrentSelect->getTrueValue(); 3053 ValueInBB TrueItem = { TrueValue, isa<Instruction>(TrueValue) 3054 ? CurrentBlock 3055 : nullptr }; 3056 assert(Map.find(TrueItem) != Map.end() && "No True Value!"); 3057 Select->setTrueValue(ST.Get(Map[TrueItem])); 3058 auto *FalseValue = CurrentSelect->getFalseValue(); 3059 ValueInBB FalseItem = { FalseValue, isa<Instruction>(FalseValue) 3060 ? CurrentBlock 3061 : nullptr }; 3062 assert(Map.find(FalseItem) != Map.end() && "No False Value!"); 3063 Select->setFalseValue(ST.Get(Map[FalseItem])); 3064 } else { 3065 // Must be a Phi node then. 3066 PHINode *PHI = cast<PHINode>(V); 3067 // Fill the Phi node with values from predecessors. 3068 bool IsDefinedInThisBB = 3069 cast<Instruction>(CurrentValue)->getParent() == CurrentBlock; 3070 auto *CurrentPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(CurrentValue); 3071 for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock)) { 3072 Value *PV = IsDefinedInThisBB 3073 ? CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B) 3074 : CurrentValue; 3075 ValueInBB item = { PV, isa<Instruction>(PV) ? B : nullptr }; 3076 assert(Map.find(item) != Map.end() && "No predecessor Value!"); 3077 PHI->addIncoming(ST.Get(Map[item]), B); 3078 } 3079 } 3080 // Simplify if possible. 3081 Map[Current] = ST.Simplify(V); 3082 } 3083 } 3084 3085 /// Starting from value recursively iterates over predecessors up to known 3086 /// ending values represented in a map. For each traversed block inserts 3087 /// a placeholder Phi or Select. 3088 /// Reports all new created Phi/Select nodes by adding them to set. 3089 /// Also reports and order in what basic blocks have been traversed. 3090 void InsertPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3091 SmallVectorImpl<ValueInBB> &TraverseOrder, 3092 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3093 SmallVector<ValueInBB, 32> Worklist; 3094 assert((isa<PHINode>(Original.first) || isa<SelectInst>(Original.first)) && 3095 "Address must be a Phi or Select node"); 3096 auto *Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 3097 Worklist.push_back(Original); 3098 while (!Worklist.empty()) { 3099 auto Current = Worklist.pop_back_val(); 3100 // If value is not an instruction it is something global, constant, 3101 // parameter and we can say that this value is observable in any block. 3102 // Set block to null to denote it. 3103 // Also please take into account that it is how we build anchors. 3104 if (!isa<Instruction>(Current.first)) 3105 Current.second = nullptr; 3106 // if it is already visited or it is an ending value then skip it. 3107 if (Map.find(Current) != Map.end()) 3108 continue; 3109 TraverseOrder.push_back(Current); 3110 3111 Value *CurrentValue = Current.first; 3112 BasicBlock *CurrentBlock = Current.second; 3113 // CurrentValue must be a Phi node or select. All others must be covered 3114 // by anchors. 3115 Instruction *CurrentI = cast<Instruction>(CurrentValue); 3116 bool IsDefinedInThisBB = CurrentI->getParent() == CurrentBlock; 3117 3118 unsigned PredCount = pred_size(CurrentBlock); 3119 // if Current Value is not defined in this basic block we are interested 3120 // in values in predecessors. 3121 if (!IsDefinedInThisBB) { 3122 assert(PredCount && "Unreachable block?!"); 3123 PHINode *PHI = PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi", 3124 &CurrentBlock->front()); 3125 Map[Current] = PHI; 3126 ST.insertNewPhi(PHI); 3127 // Add all predecessors in work list. 3128 for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock)) 3129 Worklist.push_back({ CurrentValue, B }); 3130 continue; 3131 } 3132 // Value is defined in this basic block. 3133 if (SelectInst *OrigSelect = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(CurrentI)) { 3134 // Is it OK to get metadata from OrigSelect?! 3135 // Create a Select placeholder with dummy value. 3136 SelectInst *Select = 3137 SelectInst::Create(OrigSelect->getCondition(), Dummy, Dummy, 3138 OrigSelect->getName(), OrigSelect, OrigSelect); 3139 Map[Current] = Select; 3140 ST.insertNewSelect(Select); 3141 // We are interested in True and False value in this basic block. 3142 Worklist.push_back({ OrigSelect->getTrueValue(), CurrentBlock }); 3143 Worklist.push_back({ OrigSelect->getFalseValue(), CurrentBlock }); 3144 } else { 3145 // It must be a Phi node then. 3146 auto *CurrentPhi = cast<PHINode>(CurrentI); 3147 // Create new Phi node for merge of bases. 3148 assert(PredCount && "Unreachable block?!"); 3149 PHINode *PHI = PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi", 3150 &CurrentBlock->front()); 3151 Map[Current] = PHI; 3152 ST.insertNewPhi(PHI); 3153 3154 // Add all predecessors in work list. 3155 for (auto B : predecessors(CurrentBlock)) 3156 Worklist.push_back({ CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B), B }); 3157 } 3158 } 3159 } 3160 3161 bool addrModeCombiningAllowed() { 3162 if (DisableComplexAddrModes) 3163 return false; 3164 switch (DifferentField) { 3165 default: 3166 return false; 3167 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 3168 return AddrSinkCombineBaseReg; 3169 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 3170 return AddrSinkCombineBaseGV; 3171 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 3172 return AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs; 3173 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 3174 return AddrSinkCombineScaledReg; 3175 } 3176 } 3177 }; 3178 } // end anonymous namespace 3179 3180 /// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode. 3181 /// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target, 3182 /// false if not. 3183 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, 3184 unsigned Depth) { 3185 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing 3186 // mode. Just process that directly. 3187 if (Scale == 1) 3188 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth); 3189 3190 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this. 3191 if (Scale == 0) 3192 return true; 3193 3194 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we 3195 // need an available scale field. 3196 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg) 3197 return false; 3198 3199 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode; 3200 3201 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like 3202 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8]. 3203 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale; 3204 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg; 3205 3206 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out. 3207 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 3208 return false; 3209 3210 // It was legal, so commit it. 3211 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3212 3213 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now 3214 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding 3215 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode. 3216 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr; 3217 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr. 3218 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) { 3219 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS; 3220 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale; 3221 3222 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded 3223 // this instruction. 3224 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 3225 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg)); 3226 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3227 return true; 3228 } 3229 } 3230 3231 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have. 3232 return true; 3233 } 3234 3235 /// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation 3236 /// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it. 3237 /// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least 3238 /// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can. 3239 static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) { 3240 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 3241 case Instruction::BitCast: 3242 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: 3243 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. 3244 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType()) 3245 return false; 3246 return I->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy(); 3247 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 3248 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 3249 return true; 3250 case Instruction::IntToPtr: 3251 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable. 3252 return true; 3253 case Instruction::Add: 3254 return true; 3255 case Instruction::Mul: 3256 case Instruction::Shl: 3257 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 3258 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 3259 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: 3260 return true; 3261 default: 3262 return false; 3263 } 3264 } 3265 3266 /// Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI. 3267 /// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion. 3268 /// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed 3269 /// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state. 3270 static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI, 3271 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) { 3272 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val); 3273 if (!PromotedInst) 3274 return false; 3275 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode()); 3276 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion. 3277 if (!ISDOpcode) 3278 return true; 3279 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not. 3280 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 3281 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType())); 3282 } 3283 3284 namespace { 3285 3286 /// Hepler class to perform type promotion. 3287 class TypePromotionHelper { 3288 /// Utility function to add a promoted instruction \p ExtOpnd to 3289 /// \p PromotedInsts and record the type of extension we have seen. 3290 static void addPromotedInst(InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3291 Instruction *ExtOpnd, 3292 bool IsSExt) { 3293 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3294 InstrToOrigTy::iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(ExtOpnd); 3295 if (It != PromotedInsts.end()) { 3296 // If the new extension is same as original, the information in 3297 // PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] is still correct. 3298 if (It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3299 return; 3300 3301 // Now the new extension is different from old extension, we make 3302 // the type information invalid by setting extension type to 3303 // BothExtension. 3304 ExtTy = BothExtension; 3305 } 3306 PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] = TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), ExtTy); 3307 } 3308 3309 /// Utility function to query the original type of instruction \p Opnd 3310 /// with a matched extension type. If the extension doesn't match, we 3311 /// cannot use the information we had on the original type. 3312 /// BothExtension doesn't match any extension type. 3313 static const Type *getOrigType(const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3314 Instruction *Opnd, 3315 bool IsSExt) { 3316 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3317 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd); 3318 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3319 return It->second.getPointer(); 3320 return nullptr; 3321 } 3322 3323 /// Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension 3324 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by 3325 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst. 3326 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt. 3327 /// In other words, check if: 3328 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType. 3329 /// #1 Promotion applies: 3330 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...). 3331 /// #2 Operand reuses: 3332 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType. 3333 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3334 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType, 3335 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt); 3336 3337 /// Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when 3338 /// promoting \p Inst. 3339 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) { 3340 return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0); 3341 } 3342 3343 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3344 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext. 3345 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3346 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions 3347 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3348 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3349 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3350 /// Should never be called directly. 3351 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3352 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3353 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3354 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3355 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3356 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI); 3357 3358 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3359 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext. 3360 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3361 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions 3362 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3363 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3364 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3365 /// Should never be called directly. 3366 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3367 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext, 3368 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3369 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3370 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3371 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3372 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3373 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt); 3374 3375 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3376 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther( 3377 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3378 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3379 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3380 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3381 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3382 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true); 3383 } 3384 3385 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3386 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther( 3387 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3388 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3389 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3390 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3391 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3392 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false); 3393 } 3394 3395 public: 3396 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext. 3397 using Action = Value *(*)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3398 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3399 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3400 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3401 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3402 const TargetLowering &TLI); 3403 3404 /// Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the appropriate 3405 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext. 3406 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current 3407 /// sign extension. 3408 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the 3409 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important 3410 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare 3411 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove. 3412 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3413 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3414 const TargetLowering &TLI, 3415 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts); 3416 }; 3417 3418 } // end anonymous namespace 3419 3420 bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, 3421 Type *ConsideredExtType, 3422 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3423 bool IsSExt) { 3424 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet. 3425 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we 3426 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such. 3427 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy()) 3428 return false; 3429 3430 // We can always get through zext. 3431 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst)) 3432 return true; 3433 3434 // sext(sext) is ok too. 3435 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst)) 3436 return true; 3437 3438 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the 3439 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag. 3440 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst); 3441 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) && 3442 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) || 3443 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap()))) 3444 return true; 3445 3446 // ext(and(opnd, cst)) --> and(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3447 if ((Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And || 3448 Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or)) 3449 return true; 3450 3451 // ext(xor(opnd, cst)) --> xor(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3452 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Xor) { 3453 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Inst->getOperand(1)); 3454 // Make sure it is not a NOT. 3455 if (Cst && !Cst->getValue().isAllOnesValue()) 3456 return true; 3457 } 3458 3459 // zext(shrl(opnd, cst)) --> shrl(zext(opnd), zext(cst)) 3460 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3461 // zext i32 (shrl i8 %val, 12) --> shrl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3462 // poisoned value regular value 3463 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3464 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr && !IsSExt) 3465 return true; 3466 3467 // and(ext(shl(opnd, cst)), cst) --> and(shl(ext(opnd), ext(cst)), cst) 3468 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3469 // zext i32 (shl i8 %val, 12) --> shl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3470 // poisoned value regular value 3471 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3472 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl && Inst->hasOneUse()) { 3473 const Instruction *ExtInst = 3474 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 3475 if (ExtInst->hasOneUse()) { 3476 const Instruction *AndInst = 3477 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*ExtInst->user_begin()); 3478 if (AndInst && AndInst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) { 3479 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AndInst->getOperand(1)); 3480 if (Cst && 3481 Cst->getValue().isIntN(Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth())) 3482 return true; 3483 } 3484 } 3485 } 3486 3487 // Check if we can do the following simplification. 3488 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd) 3489 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst)) 3490 return false; 3491 3492 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0); 3493 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension. 3494 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot. 3495 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 3496 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 3497 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth()) 3498 return false; 3499 3500 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have 3501 // any information on the dropped bits. 3502 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic). 3503 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal); 3504 if (!Opnd) 3505 return false; 3506 3507 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough. 3508 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of 3509 // the extension. 3510 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits. 3511 const Type *OpndType = getOrigType(PromotedInsts, Opnd, IsSExt); 3512 if (OpndType) 3513 ; 3514 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd))) 3515 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType(); 3516 else 3517 return false; 3518 3519 // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits. 3520 return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >= 3521 OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3522 } 3523 3524 TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction( 3525 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3526 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) { 3527 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) && 3528 "Unexpected instruction type"); 3529 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3530 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType(); 3531 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext); 3532 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot 3533 // get through. 3534 // If it, check we can get through. 3535 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt)) 3536 return nullptr; 3537 3538 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare. 3539 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be 3540 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop. 3541 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd)) 3542 return nullptr; 3543 3544 // SExt or Trunc instructions. 3545 // Return the related handler. 3546 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) || 3547 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd)) 3548 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt; 3549 3550 // Regular instruction. 3551 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions. 3552 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType())) 3553 return nullptr; 3554 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther; 3555 } 3556 3557 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3558 Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3559 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3560 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3561 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3562 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3563 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3564 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0)); 3565 Value *ExtVal = SExt; 3566 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false; 3567 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) { 3568 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd)) 3569 // => zext(opnd). 3570 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd); 3571 Value *ZExt = 3572 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType()); 3573 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt); 3574 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt); 3575 ExtVal = ZExt; 3576 } else { 3577 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd)) 3578 // => z|sext(opnd). 3579 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0)); 3580 } 3581 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3582 3583 // Remove dead code. 3584 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty()) 3585 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd); 3586 3587 // Check if the extension is still needed. 3588 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal); 3589 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) { 3590 if (ExtInst) { 3591 if (Exts) 3592 Exts->push_back(ExtInst); 3593 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt; 3594 } 3595 return ExtVal; 3596 } 3597 3598 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty. 3599 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst. 3600 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0); 3601 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal); 3602 return NextVal; 3603 } 3604 3605 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther( 3606 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3607 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3608 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3609 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI, 3610 bool IsSExt) { 3611 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3612 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3613 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3614 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3615 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) { 3616 // ExtOpnd will be promoted. 3617 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the 3618 // promoted version. 3619 // Create the truncate now. 3620 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType()); 3621 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) { 3622 // Insert it just after the definition. 3623 ITrunc->moveAfter(ExtOpnd); 3624 if (Truncs) 3625 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc); 3626 } 3627 3628 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc); 3629 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call 3630 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext. 3631 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd); 3632 } 3633 3634 // Get through the Instruction: 3635 // 1. Update its type. 3636 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst. 3637 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended. 3638 3639 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion. 3640 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits. 3641 addPromotedInst(PromotedInsts, ExtOpnd, IsSExt); 3642 // Step #1. 3643 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType()); 3644 // Step #2. 3645 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd); 3646 // Step #3. 3647 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext; 3648 3649 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n"); 3650 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx; 3651 ++OpIdx) { 3652 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n'); 3653 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() || 3654 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) { 3655 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n"); 3656 continue; 3657 } 3658 // Check if we can statically extend the operand. 3659 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx); 3660 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) { 3661 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3662 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3663 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth) 3664 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth); 3665 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal)); 3666 continue; 3667 } 3668 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them. 3669 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) { 3670 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3671 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType())); 3672 continue; 3673 } 3674 3675 // Otherwise we have to explicitly sign extend the operand. 3676 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand. 3677 if (!ExtForOpnd) { 3678 // If yes, create a new one. 3679 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n"); 3680 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()) 3681 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()); 3682 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) { 3683 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd); 3684 continue; 3685 } 3686 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd); 3687 } 3688 if (Exts) 3689 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd); 3690 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd); 3691 3692 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point. 3693 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd); 3694 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd); 3695 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd); 3696 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created. 3697 ExtForOpnd = nullptr; 3698 } 3699 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) { 3700 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n"); 3701 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext); 3702 } 3703 return ExtOpnd; 3704 } 3705 3706 /// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable. 3707 /// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the 3708 /// promotion. 3709 /// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion 3710 /// plus the number of instructions that have been 3711 /// matched in the addressing mode the promotion. 3712 /// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted. 3713 /// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise. 3714 bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable( 3715 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const { 3716 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost 3717 << '\n'); 3718 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the 3719 // old extension plus what we folded. 3720 // This is not profitable. 3721 if (NewCost > OldCost) 3722 return false; 3723 if (NewCost < OldCost) 3724 return true; 3725 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in 3726 // loads for instance. 3727 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction. 3728 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand); 3729 } 3730 3731 /// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation 3732 /// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return 3733 /// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode. 3734 /// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or 3735 /// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success. 3736 /// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing 3737 /// because it has been moved away. 3738 /// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions. 3739 /// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away. 3740 /// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must 3741 /// not be referenced anymore. 3742 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, 3743 unsigned Depth, 3744 bool *MovedAway) { 3745 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees. 3746 if (Depth >= 5) return false; 3747 3748 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place. 3749 if (MovedAway) 3750 *MovedAway = false; 3751 3752 switch (Opcode) { 3753 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 3754 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 3755 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 3756 case Instruction::IntToPtr: { 3757 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 3758 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS)); 3759 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized. 3760 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy) 3761 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 3762 return false; 3763 } 3764 case Instruction::BitCast: 3765 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is 3766 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something). 3767 if (AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy() && 3768 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR, 3769 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it 3770 // is doing. 3771 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType()) 3772 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 3773 return false; 3774 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: { 3775 unsigned SrcAS 3776 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 3777 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 3778 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS)) 3779 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 3780 return false; 3781 } 3782 case Instruction::Add: { 3783 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win. 3784 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 3785 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 3786 // Start a transaction at this point. 3787 // The LHS may match but not the RHS. 3788 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially 3789 // matched operation. 3790 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 3791 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 3792 3793 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) && 3794 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) 3795 return true; 3796 3797 // Restore the old addr mode info. 3798 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3799 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3800 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 3801 3802 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS. 3803 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) && 3804 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1)) 3805 return true; 3806 3807 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in. 3808 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3809 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3810 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 3811 break; 3812 } 3813 //case Instruction::Or: 3814 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD. 3815 //break; 3816 case Instruction::Mul: 3817 case Instruction::Shl: { 3818 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 3819 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1)); 3820 if (!RHS || RHS->getBitWidth() > 64) 3821 return false; 3822 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue(); 3823 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl) 3824 Scale = 1LL << Scale; 3825 3826 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth); 3827 } 3828 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: { 3829 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most 3830 // one variable offset. 3831 int VariableOperand = -1; 3832 unsigned VariableScale = 0; 3833 3834 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0; 3835 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst); 3836 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) { 3837 if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) { 3838 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy); 3839 unsigned Idx = 3840 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue(); 3841 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx); 3842 } else { 3843 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType()); 3844 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) { 3845 const APInt &CVal = CI->getValue(); 3846 if (CVal.getMinSignedBits() <= 64) { 3847 ConstantOffset += CVal.getSExtValue() * TypeSize; 3848 continue; 3849 } 3850 } 3851 if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything. 3852 // We only allow one variable index at the moment. 3853 if (VariableOperand != -1) 3854 return false; 3855 3856 // Remember the variable index. 3857 VariableOperand = i; 3858 VariableScale = TypeSize; 3859 } 3860 } 3861 } 3862 3863 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case, 3864 // just add it to the disp field and check validity. 3865 if (VariableOperand == -1) { 3866 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 3867 if (ConstantOffset == 0 || 3868 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 3869 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too. 3870 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) 3871 return true; 3872 } else if (EnableGEPOffsetSplit && isa<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst) && 3873 TLI.shouldConsiderGEPOffsetSplit() && Depth == 0 && 3874 ConstantOffset > 0) { 3875 // Record GEPs with non-zero offsets as candidates for splitting in the 3876 // event that the offset cannot fit into the r+i addressing mode. 3877 // Simple and common case that only one GEP is used in calculating the 3878 // address for the memory access. 3879 Value *Base = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 3880 auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Base); 3881 auto *GEP = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst); 3882 if (isa<Argument>(Base) || isa<GlobalValue>(Base) || 3883 (BaseI && !isa<CastInst>(BaseI) && 3884 !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(BaseI))) { 3885 // If the base is an instruction, make sure the GEP is not in the same 3886 // basic block as the base. If the base is an argument or global 3887 // value, make sure the GEP is not in the entry block. Otherwise, 3888 // instruction selection can undo the split. Also make sure the 3889 // parent block allows inserting non-PHI instructions before the 3890 // terminator. 3891 BasicBlock *Parent = 3892 BaseI ? BaseI->getParent() : &GEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 3893 if (GEP->getParent() != Parent && !Parent->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 3894 LargeOffsetGEP = std::make_pair(GEP, ConstantOffset); 3895 } 3896 } 3897 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset; 3898 return false; 3899 } 3900 3901 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match. 3902 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 3903 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 3904 3905 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target. 3906 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 3907 3908 // Match the base operand of the GEP. 3909 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) { 3910 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register. 3911 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 3912 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3913 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3914 return false; 3915 } 3916 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 3917 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 3918 } 3919 3920 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP. 3921 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale, 3922 Depth)) { 3923 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register 3924 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale. 3925 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3926 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3927 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) 3928 return false; 3929 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 3930 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 3931 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 3932 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), 3933 VariableScale, Depth)) { 3934 // If even that didn't work, bail. 3935 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3936 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3937 return false; 3938 } 3939 } 3940 3941 return true; 3942 } 3943 case Instruction::SExt: 3944 case Instruction::ZExt: { 3945 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst); 3946 if (!Ext) 3947 return false; 3948 3949 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode. 3950 // Ask for a method for doing so. 3951 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 3952 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts); 3953 if (!TPH) 3954 return false; 3955 3956 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 3957 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 3958 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3959 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext); 3960 Value *PromotedOperand = 3961 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI); 3962 // SExt has been moved away. 3963 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is 3964 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point. 3965 // E.g., 3966 // op = add opnd, 1 3967 // idx = ext op 3968 // addr = gep base, idx 3969 // is now: 3970 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here 3971 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls) 3972 // addr = gep base, op <- match 3973 if (MovedAway) 3974 *MovedAway = true; 3975 3976 assert(PromotedOperand && 3977 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 3978 3979 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 3980 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 3981 3982 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) || 3983 // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created 3984 // instructions. 3985 // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus 3986 // what we have saved in the addressing mode. 3987 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost, 3988 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize), 3989 PromotedOperand)) { 3990 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 3991 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 3992 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n"); 3993 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 3994 return false; 3995 } 3996 return true; 3997 } 3998 } 3999 return false; 4000 } 4001 4002 /// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode. 4003 /// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode 4004 /// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t 4005 /// for the target. 4006 /// 4007 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) { 4008 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching 4009 // fails. 4010 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4011 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4012 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) { 4013 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target. 4014 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue(); 4015 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4016 return true; 4017 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue(); 4018 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) { 4019 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode. 4020 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4021 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV; 4022 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4023 return true; 4024 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr; 4025 } 4026 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) { 4027 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4028 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4029 4030 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation. 4031 bool MovedAway = false; 4032 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) { 4033 // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing 4034 // to check here. 4035 if (MovedAway) 4036 return true; 4037 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually 4038 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing 4039 // register pressure too much. 4040 if (I->hasOneUse() || 4041 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) { 4042 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I); 4043 return true; 4044 } 4045 4046 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back. 4047 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I; 4048 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4049 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4050 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4051 } 4052 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) { 4053 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth)) 4054 return true; 4055 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4056 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) { 4057 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode. 4058 return true; 4059 } 4060 4061 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :) 4062 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 4063 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4064 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr; 4065 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r]. 4066 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4067 return true; 4068 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false; 4069 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4070 } 4071 4072 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r]. 4073 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) { 4074 AddrMode.Scale = 1; 4075 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr; 4076 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4077 return true; 4078 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4079 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr; 4080 } 4081 // Couldn't match. 4082 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4083 return false; 4084 } 4085 4086 /// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due 4087 /// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false. 4088 static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal, 4089 const TargetLowering &TLI, 4090 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) { 4091 const Function *F = CI->getFunction(); 4092 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 4093 TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI, 4094 ImmutableCallSite(CI)); 4095 4096 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4097 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 4098 4099 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 4100 TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 4101 4102 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory 4103 // operand, we can't fold it! 4104 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal && 4105 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory || 4106 !OpInfo.isIndirect)) 4107 return false; 4108 } 4109 4110 return true; 4111 } 4112 4113 // Max number of memory uses to look at before aborting the search to conserve 4114 // compile time. 4115 static constexpr int MaxMemoryUsesToScan = 20; 4116 4117 /// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use. 4118 /// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true. 4119 /// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses. 4120 static bool FindAllMemoryUses( 4121 Instruction *I, 4122 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses, 4123 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetLowering &TLI, 4124 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, int SeenInsts = 0) { 4125 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done. 4126 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second) 4127 return false; 4128 4129 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out. 4130 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I)) 4131 return true; 4132 4133 const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize(); 4134 4135 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them. 4136 for (Use &U : I->uses()) { 4137 // Conservatively return true if we're seeing a large number or a deep chain 4138 // of users. This avoids excessive compilation times in pathological cases. 4139 if (SeenInsts++ >= MaxMemoryUsesToScan) 4140 return true; 4141 4142 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 4143 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) { 4144 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo())); 4145 continue; 4146 } 4147 4148 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) { 4149 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4150 if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4151 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4152 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo)); 4153 continue; 4154 } 4155 4156 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) { 4157 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4158 if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4159 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4160 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo)); 4161 continue; 4162 } 4163 4164 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) { 4165 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4166 if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4167 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4168 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo)); 4169 continue; 4170 } 4171 4172 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) { 4173 // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into 4174 // the cold path. See optimizeCallInst 4175 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 4176 continue; 4177 4178 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue()); 4179 if (!IA) return true; 4180 4181 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out. 4182 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI)) 4183 return true; 4184 continue; 4185 } 4186 4187 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI, 4188 SeenInsts)) 4189 return true; 4190 } 4191 4192 return false; 4193 } 4194 4195 /// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're 4196 /// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing 4197 /// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the 4198 /// instruction already. 4199 bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1, 4200 Value *KnownLive2) { 4201 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live! 4202 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2) 4203 return true; 4204 4205 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live. 4206 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true; 4207 4208 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is 4209 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is 4210 // live for the whole function. 4211 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) 4212 if (AI->isStaticAlloca()) 4213 return true; 4214 4215 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's 4216 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we 4217 // can reasonably fold it. 4218 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent()); 4219 } 4220 4221 /// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified 4222 /// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it. 4223 /// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses. 4224 /// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it 4225 /// into the load. For example, consider this code: 4226 /// 4227 /// X = ... 4228 /// Y = X+1 4229 /// use(Y) -> nonload/store 4230 /// Z = Y+1 4231 /// load Z 4232 /// 4233 /// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z 4234 /// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to 4235 /// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one 4236 /// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the 4237 /// number of computations either. 4238 /// 4239 /// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If 4240 /// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to 4241 /// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier. 4242 bool AddressingModeMatcher:: 4243 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 4244 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) { 4245 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true; 4246 4247 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it, 4248 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get 4249 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those 4250 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this 4251 // address extends the lifetime of. 4252 // 4253 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here, 4254 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any 4255 // folded immediates). 4256 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg; 4257 4258 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their 4259 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction. 4260 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4261 BaseReg = nullptr; 4262 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4263 ScaledReg = nullptr; 4264 4265 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live 4266 // ranges, we're ok with it. 4267 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg) 4268 return true; 4269 4270 // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them, 4271 // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register 4272 // for another (at worst.) In this context, folding an addressing mode into 4273 // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it. 4274 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses; 4275 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts; 4276 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI)) 4277 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use! 4278 4279 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of 4280 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded 4281 // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see 4282 // if they could *actually* fold the instruction. The assumption is that 4283 // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved 4284 // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates 4285 // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code 4286 // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to 4287 // compute an effective address. (i.e LEA on x86) 4288 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts; 4289 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4290 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first; 4291 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second; 4292 4293 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't 4294 // know what it accesses. 4295 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo); 4296 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType()); 4297 if (!AddrTy) 4298 return false; 4299 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType(); 4300 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace(); 4301 4302 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This 4303 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will 4304 // *actually* cover the shared instruction. 4305 ExtAddrMode Result; 4306 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4307 0); 4308 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4309 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4310 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher( 4311 MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AddressAccessTy, AS, MemoryInst, Result, 4312 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4313 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true; 4314 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0); 4315 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 4316 4317 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not 4318 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped 4319 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state. 4320 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4321 4322 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it. 4323 if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I)) 4324 return false; 4325 4326 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear(); 4327 } 4328 4329 return true; 4330 } 4331 4332 /// Return true if the specified values are defined in a 4333 /// different basic block than BB. 4334 static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) { 4335 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) 4336 return I->getParent() != BB; 4337 return false; 4338 } 4339 4340 /// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so 4341 /// can be done without increasing register pressure. The need for the 4342 /// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing 4343 /// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation. 4344 /// 4345 /// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do 4346 /// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try 4347 /// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the 4348 /// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As 4349 /// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible. 4350 /// 4351 /// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory 4352 /// operands. It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold 4353 /// call sites into their (cold) basic block. 4354 /// 4355 /// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can 4356 /// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure 4357 /// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the 4358 /// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.). 4359 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 4360 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) { 4361 Value *Repl = Addr; 4362 4363 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo 4364 // unprofitable PRE transformations. 4365 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist; 4366 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited; 4367 worklist.push_back(Addr); 4368 4369 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI and select nodes, and 4370 // ensure that the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI/select roots of 4371 // the graph are compatible. 4372 bool PhiOrSelectSeen = false; 4373 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts; 4374 const SimplifyQuery SQ(*DL, TLInfo); 4375 AddressingModeCombiner AddrModes(SQ, { Addr, MemoryInst->getParent() }); 4376 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 4377 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4378 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4379 while (!worklist.empty()) { 4380 Value *V = worklist.back(); 4381 worklist.pop_back(); 4382 4383 // We allow traversing cyclic Phi nodes. 4384 // In case of success after this loop we ensure that traversing through 4385 // Phi nodes ends up with all cases to compute address of the form 4386 // BaseGV + Base + Scale * Index + Offset 4387 // where Scale and Offset are constans and BaseGV, Base and Index 4388 // are exactly the same Values in all cases. 4389 // It means that BaseGV, Scale and Offset dominate our memory instruction 4390 // and have the same value as they had in address computation represented 4391 // as Phi. So we can safely sink address computation to memory instruction. 4392 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) 4393 continue; 4394 4395 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values. 4396 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) { 4397 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values()) 4398 worklist.push_back(IncValue); 4399 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4400 continue; 4401 } 4402 // Similar for select. 4403 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 4404 worklist.push_back(SI->getFalseValue()); 4405 worklist.push_back(SI->getTrueValue()); 4406 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4407 continue; 4408 } 4409 4410 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed. Note that 4411 // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate 4412 // addressing instructions might have. 4413 AddrModeInsts.clear(); 4414 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4415 0); 4416 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match( 4417 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, AddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI, 4418 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4419 4420 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP.first; 4421 if (GEP && GEP->getParent() != MemoryInst->getParent() && 4422 !NewGEPBases.count(GEP)) { 4423 // If splitting the underlying data structure can reduce the offset of a 4424 // GEP, collect the GEP. Skip the GEPs that are the new bases of 4425 // previously split data structures. 4426 LargeOffsetGEPMap[GEP->getPointerOperand()].push_back(LargeOffsetGEP); 4427 if (LargeOffsetGEPID.find(GEP) == LargeOffsetGEPID.end()) 4428 LargeOffsetGEPID[GEP] = LargeOffsetGEPID.size(); 4429 } 4430 4431 NewAddrMode.OriginalValue = V; 4432 if (!AddrModes.addNewAddrMode(NewAddrMode)) 4433 break; 4434 } 4435 4436 // Try to combine the AddrModes we've collected. If we couldn't collect any, 4437 // or we have multiple but either couldn't combine them or combining them 4438 // wouldn't do anything useful, bail out now. 4439 if (!AddrModes.combineAddrModes()) { 4440 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4441 return false; 4442 } 4443 TPT.commit(); 4444 4445 // Get the combined AddrMode (or the only AddrMode, if we only had one). 4446 ExtAddrMode AddrMode = AddrModes.getAddrMode(); 4447 4448 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything. 4449 // If we saw a Phi node then it is not local definitely, and if we saw a select 4450 // then we want to push the address calculation past it even if it's already 4451 // in this BB. 4452 if (!PhiOrSelectSeen && none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) { 4453 return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent()); 4454 })) { 4455 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode 4456 << "\n"); 4457 return false; 4458 } 4459 4460 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is 4461 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are 4462 // guaranteed to happen later. 4463 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst); 4464 4465 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know 4466 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already 4467 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse 4468 // the computation. Before attempting reuse, check if the address is valid 4469 // as it may have been erased. 4470 4471 WeakTrackingVH SunkAddrVH = SunkAddrs[Addr]; 4472 4473 Value * SunkAddr = SunkAddrVH.pointsToAliveValue() ? SunkAddrVH : nullptr; 4474 if (SunkAddr) { 4475 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4476 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4477 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4478 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4479 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs || 4480 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM && TTI->useAA())) { 4481 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This 4482 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities. 4483 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4484 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4485 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4486 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr; 4487 4488 // First, find the pointer. 4489 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4490 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4491 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4492 } 4493 4494 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4495 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a 4496 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless). 4497 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4498 return false; 4499 4500 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4501 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4502 } 4503 4504 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4505 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4506 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4507 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4508 // do not match instead of extending it. 4509 // 4510 // (See below for code to add the scale.) 4511 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4512 Type *ScaledRegTy = AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType(); 4513 if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() > 4514 cast<IntegerType>(ScaledRegTy)->getBitWidth()) 4515 return false; 4516 } 4517 4518 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4519 if (ResultPtr) 4520 return false; 4521 4522 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV; 4523 } 4524 4525 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher 4526 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case, 4527 // use it here. 4528 if (!DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType())) { 4529 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4530 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), 4531 "sunkaddr"); 4532 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4533 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) { 4534 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), 4535 "sunkaddr"); 4536 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4537 } 4538 } 4539 4540 if (!ResultPtr && 4541 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4542 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 4543 } else if (!ResultPtr) { 4544 return false; 4545 } else { 4546 Type *I8PtrTy = 4547 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 4548 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty(); 4549 4550 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4551 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4552 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4553 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4554 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4555 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4556 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4557 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4558 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4559 4560 ResultIndex = V; 4561 } 4562 4563 // Add the scale value. 4564 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4565 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4566 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4567 // done. 4568 } else { 4569 assert(cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4570 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth() && 4571 "We can't transform if ScaledReg is too narrow"); 4572 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4573 } 4574 4575 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4576 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4577 "sunkaddr"); 4578 if (ResultIndex) 4579 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr"); 4580 else 4581 ResultIndex = V; 4582 } 4583 4584 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 4585 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4586 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 4587 if (ResultIndex) { 4588 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with 4589 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging. 4590 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4591 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4592 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4593 } 4594 4595 ResultIndex = V; 4596 } 4597 4598 if (!ResultIndex) { 4599 SunkAddr = ResultPtr; 4600 } else { 4601 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4602 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4603 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4604 } 4605 4606 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4607 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4608 } 4609 } else { 4610 // We'd require a ptrtoint/inttoptr down the line, which we can't do for 4611 // non-integral pointers, so in that case bail out now. 4612 Type *BaseTy = AddrMode.BaseReg ? AddrMode.BaseReg->getType() : nullptr; 4613 Type *ScaleTy = AddrMode.Scale ? AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType() : nullptr; 4614 PointerType *BasePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(BaseTy); 4615 PointerType *ScalePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(ScaleTy); 4616 if (DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType()) || 4617 (BasePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(BasePtrTy)) || 4618 (ScalePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(ScalePtrTy)) || 4619 (AddrMode.BaseGV && 4620 DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(AddrMode.BaseGV->getType()))) 4621 return false; 4622 4623 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4624 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4625 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4626 Value *Result = nullptr; 4627 4628 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4629 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4630 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4631 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4632 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4633 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4634 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4635 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) 4636 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4637 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4638 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4639 Result = V; 4640 } 4641 4642 // Add the scale value. 4643 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4644 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4645 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4646 // done. 4647 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4648 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4649 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4650 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) { 4651 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4652 } else { 4653 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4654 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4655 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4656 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4657 // do not match instead of extending it. 4658 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result); 4659 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg)) 4660 I->eraseFromParent(); 4661 return false; 4662 } 4663 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4664 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4665 "sunkaddr"); 4666 if (Result) 4667 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4668 else 4669 Result = V; 4670 } 4671 4672 // Add in the BaseGV if present. 4673 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4674 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4675 if (Result) 4676 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4677 else 4678 Result = V; 4679 } 4680 4681 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 4682 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4683 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 4684 if (Result) 4685 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4686 else 4687 Result = V; 4688 } 4689 4690 if (!Result) 4691 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 4692 else 4693 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr"); 4694 } 4695 4696 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr); 4697 // Store the newly computed address into the cache. In the case we reused a 4698 // value, this should be idempotent. 4699 SunkAddrs[Addr] = WeakTrackingVH(SunkAddr); 4700 4701 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions 4702 // using it. 4703 if (Repl->use_empty()) { 4704 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator. 4705 // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens. 4706 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 4707 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 4708 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent(); 4709 4710 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo); 4711 4712 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 4713 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 4714 // start of the block. 4715 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 4716 SunkAddrs.clear(); 4717 } 4718 } 4719 ++NumMemoryInsts; 4720 return true; 4721 } 4722 4723 /// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their 4724 /// address computing into the block when possible / profitable. 4725 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) { 4726 bool MadeChange = false; 4727 4728 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI = 4729 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getFunction())->getRegisterInfo(); 4730 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 4731 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS); 4732 unsigned ArgNo = 0; 4733 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4734 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 4735 4736 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 4737 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 4738 4739 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory && 4740 OpInfo.isIndirect) { 4741 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++); 4742 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u); 4743 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput) 4744 ArgNo++; 4745 } 4746 4747 return MadeChange; 4748 } 4749 4750 /// Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or 4751 /// sign extensions. 4752 static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 4753 assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use"); 4754 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin()); 4755 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser); 4756 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType(); 4757 for (const User *U : Val->users()) { 4758 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 4759 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI))) 4760 return false; 4761 Type *CurTy = UI->getType(); 4762 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE. 4763 if (CurTy == ExtTy) 4764 continue; 4765 4766 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation: 4767 // a = Val 4768 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 4769 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3 4770 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into: 4771 // a = Val 4772 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 4773 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3 4774 // However, the last sext is not free. 4775 if (IsSExt) 4776 return false; 4777 4778 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another. 4779 // In that case, we would not account for a different use. 4780 Type *NarrowTy; 4781 Type *LargeTy; 4782 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 4783 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) { 4784 NarrowTy = CurTy; 4785 LargeTy = ExtTy; 4786 } else { 4787 NarrowTy = ExtTy; 4788 LargeTy = CurTy; 4789 } 4790 4791 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy)) 4792 return false; 4793 } 4794 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free. 4795 return true; 4796 } 4797 4798 /// Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue 4799 /// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is 4800 /// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts. 4801 /// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert 4802 /// them. 4803 /// 4804 /// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise. 4805 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts( 4806 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 4807 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 4808 unsigned CreatedInstsCost) { 4809 bool Promoted = false; 4810 4811 // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them. 4812 for (auto I : Exts) { 4813 // Early check if we directly have ext(load). 4814 if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) { 4815 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 4816 continue; 4817 } 4818 4819 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion. The reason we have 4820 // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension 4821 // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved 4822 // up without any promotion on its operands. 4823 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion) 4824 return false; 4825 4826 // Get the action to perform the promotion. 4827 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 4828 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts); 4829 // Check if we can promote. 4830 if (!TPH) { 4831 // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand. 4832 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 4833 continue; 4834 } 4835 4836 // Save the current state. 4837 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4838 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4839 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts; 4840 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0; 4841 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I); 4842 // Promote. 4843 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost, 4844 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI); 4845 assert(PromotedVal && 4846 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 4847 4848 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load. 4849 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically 4850 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality. 4851 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge 4852 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going, 4853 // because the new extension may be removed too. 4854 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost; 4855 // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of 4856 // conservatively ceiling it to 0. 4857 TotalCreatedInstsCost = 4858 std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost)); 4859 if (!StressExtLdPromotion && 4860 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 || 4861 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) { 4862 // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and 4863 // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest 4864 // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable. 4865 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4866 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 4867 continue; 4868 } 4869 // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable. 4870 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts; 4871 (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost); 4872 bool NewPromoted = false; 4873 for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) { 4874 Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst); 4875 Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0); 4876 // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check 4877 // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load). 4878 if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) && 4879 !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost || 4880 (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI)))) 4881 continue; 4882 4883 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt); 4884 NewPromoted = true; 4885 } 4886 4887 // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback 4888 // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension. 4889 if (!NewPromoted) { 4890 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4891 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 4892 continue; 4893 } 4894 // The promotion is profitable. 4895 Promoted = true; 4896 } 4897 return Promoted; 4898 } 4899 4900 /// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other. 4901 bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F) { 4902 DominatorTree DT(F); 4903 bool Changed = false; 4904 for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) { 4905 SExts &Insts = Entry.second; 4906 SExts CurPts; 4907 for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) { 4908 if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) || 4909 Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first) 4910 continue; 4911 bool inserted = false; 4912 for (auto &Pt : CurPts) { 4913 if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) { 4914 Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst); 4915 RemovedInsts.insert(Pt); 4916 Pt->removeFromParent(); 4917 Pt = Inst; 4918 inserted = true; 4919 Changed = true; 4920 break; 4921 } 4922 if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst)) 4923 // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the 4924 // experiments show it is not profitable. 4925 continue; 4926 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt); 4927 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 4928 Inst->removeFromParent(); 4929 inserted = true; 4930 Changed = true; 4931 break; 4932 } 4933 if (!inserted) 4934 CurPts.push_back(Inst); 4935 } 4936 } 4937 return Changed; 4938 } 4939 4940 // Spliting large data structures so that the GEPs accessing them can have 4941 // smaller offsets so that they can be sunk to the same blocks as their users. 4942 // For example, a large struct starting from %base is splitted into two parts 4943 // where the second part starts from %new_base. 4944 // 4945 // Before: 4946 // BB0: 4947 // %base = 4948 // 4949 // BB1: 4950 // %gep0 = gep %base, off0 4951 // %gep1 = gep %base, off1 4952 // %gep2 = gep %base, off2 4953 // 4954 // BB2: 4955 // %load1 = load %gep0 4956 // %load2 = load %gep1 4957 // %load3 = load %gep2 4958 // 4959 // After: 4960 // BB0: 4961 // %base = 4962 // %new_base = gep %base, off0 4963 // 4964 // BB1: 4965 // %new_gep0 = %new_base 4966 // %new_gep1 = gep %new_base, off1 - off0 4967 // %new_gep2 = gep %new_base, off2 - off0 4968 // 4969 // BB2: 4970 // %load1 = load i32, i32* %new_gep0 4971 // %load2 = load i32, i32* %new_gep1 4972 // %load3 = load i32, i32* %new_gep2 4973 // 4974 // %new_gep1 and %new_gep2 can be sunk to BB2 now after the splitting because 4975 // their offsets are smaller enough to fit into the addressing mode. 4976 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitLargeGEPOffsets() { 4977 bool Changed = false; 4978 for (auto &Entry : LargeOffsetGEPMap) { 4979 Value *OldBase = Entry.first; 4980 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>> 4981 &LargeOffsetGEPs = Entry.second; 4982 auto compareGEPOffset = 4983 [&](const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &LHS, 4984 const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &RHS) { 4985 if (LHS.first == RHS.first) 4986 return false; 4987 if (LHS.second != RHS.second) 4988 return LHS.second < RHS.second; 4989 return LargeOffsetGEPID[LHS.first] < LargeOffsetGEPID[RHS.first]; 4990 }; 4991 // Sorting all the GEPs of the same data structures based on the offsets. 4992 llvm::sort(LargeOffsetGEPs, compareGEPOffset); 4993 LargeOffsetGEPs.erase( 4994 std::unique(LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(), LargeOffsetGEPs.end()), 4995 LargeOffsetGEPs.end()); 4996 // Skip if all the GEPs have the same offsets. 4997 if (LargeOffsetGEPs.front().second == LargeOffsetGEPs.back().second) 4998 continue; 4999 GetElementPtrInst *BaseGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->first; 5000 int64_t BaseOffset = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->second; 5001 Value *NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5002 5003 auto LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(); 5004 while (LargeOffsetGEP != LargeOffsetGEPs.end()) { 5005 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP->first; 5006 int64_t Offset = LargeOffsetGEP->second; 5007 if (Offset != BaseOffset) { 5008 TargetLowering::AddrMode AddrMode; 5009 AddrMode.BaseOffs = Offset - BaseOffset; 5010 // The result type of the GEP might not be the type of the memory 5011 // access. 5012 if (!TLI->isLegalAddressingMode(*DL, AddrMode, 5013 GEP->getResultElementType(), 5014 GEP->getAddressSpace())) { 5015 // We need to create a new base if the offset to the current base is 5016 // too large to fit into the addressing mode. So, a very large struct 5017 // may be splitted into several parts. 5018 BaseGEP = GEP; 5019 BaseOffset = Offset; 5020 NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5021 } 5022 } 5023 5024 // Generate a new GEP to replace the current one. 5025 IRBuilder<> Builder(GEP); 5026 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(GEP->getType()); 5027 Type *I8PtrTy = 5028 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(GEP->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 5029 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty(); 5030 5031 if (!NewBaseGEP) { 5032 // Create a new base if we don't have one yet. Find the insertion 5033 // pointer for the new base first. 5034 BasicBlock::iterator NewBaseInsertPt; 5035 BasicBlock *NewBaseInsertBB; 5036 if (auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OldBase)) { 5037 // If the base of the struct is an instruction, the new base will be 5038 // inserted close to it. 5039 NewBaseInsertBB = BaseI->getParent(); 5040 if (isa<PHINode>(BaseI)) 5041 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5042 else if (InvokeInst *Invoke = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(BaseI)) { 5043 NewBaseInsertBB = 5044 SplitEdge(NewBaseInsertBB, Invoke->getNormalDest()); 5045 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5046 } else 5047 NewBaseInsertPt = std::next(BaseI->getIterator()); 5048 } else { 5049 // If the current base is an argument or global value, the new base 5050 // will be inserted to the entry block. 5051 NewBaseInsertBB = &BaseGEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 5052 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5053 } 5054 IRBuilder<> NewBaseBuilder(NewBaseInsertBB, NewBaseInsertPt); 5055 // Create a new base. 5056 Value *BaseIndex = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffset); 5057 NewBaseGEP = OldBase; 5058 if (NewBaseGEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5059 NewBaseGEP = NewBaseBuilder.CreatePointerCast(NewBaseGEP, I8PtrTy); 5060 NewBaseGEP = 5061 NewBaseBuilder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, BaseIndex, "splitgep"); 5062 NewGEPBases.insert(NewBaseGEP); 5063 } 5064 5065 Value *NewGEP = NewBaseGEP; 5066 if (Offset == BaseOffset) { 5067 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5068 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5069 } else { 5070 // Calculate the new offset for the new GEP. 5071 Value *Index = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, Offset - BaseOffset); 5072 NewGEP = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, Index); 5073 5074 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5075 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5076 } 5077 GEP->replaceAllUsesWith(NewGEP); 5078 LargeOffsetGEPID.erase(GEP); 5079 LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.erase(LargeOffsetGEP); 5080 GEP->eraseFromParent(); 5081 Changed = true; 5082 } 5083 } 5084 return Changed; 5085 } 5086 5087 /// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in 5088 /// \p MovedExts. 5089 bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd( 5090 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI, 5091 Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) { 5092 for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) { 5093 if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) { 5094 LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0)); 5095 Inst = MovedExtInst; 5096 break; 5097 } 5098 } 5099 if (!LI) 5100 return false; 5101 5102 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do. 5103 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote. 5104 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable. 5105 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent()) 5106 return false; 5107 5108 return TLI->isExtLoad(LI, Inst, *DL); 5109 } 5110 5111 /// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load, 5112 /// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the 5113 /// extend into the load. 5114 /// 5115 /// E.g., 5116 /// \code 5117 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5118 /// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4 5119 /// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64 5120 // \endcode 5121 /// => 5122 /// \code 5123 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5124 /// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64 5125 /// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4 5126 /// \encode 5127 /// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which 5128 /// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64. 5129 /// 5130 /// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended 5131 /// value used into memory accesses. 5132 /// E.g., 5133 /// \code 5134 /// a = add nsw i32 b, 3 5135 /// d = sext i32 a to i64 5136 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d 5137 /// \endcode 5138 /// => 5139 /// \code 5140 /// f = sext i32 b to i64 5141 /// a = add nsw i64 f, 3 5142 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a 5143 /// \endcode 5144 /// 5145 /// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some 5146 /// promotions apply. 5147 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) { 5148 // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to 5149 // be effective. 5150 if (!TLI) 5151 return false; 5152 5153 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false; 5154 /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type 5155 /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right 5156 /// type and used in memory accesses. 5157 bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion( 5158 *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader); 5159 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5160 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 5161 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 5162 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5163 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts; 5164 Exts.push_back(Inst); 5165 5166 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts); 5167 5168 // Look for a load being extended. 5169 LoadInst *LI = nullptr; 5170 Instruction *ExtFedByLoad; 5171 5172 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended 5173 // load. 5174 if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) { 5175 assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension"); 5176 TPT.commit(); 5177 // Move the extend into the same block as the load 5178 ExtFedByLoad->moveAfter(LI); 5179 // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved 5180 // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location 5181 // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact 5182 // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a 5183 // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as 5184 // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug 5185 // location for the load and the zext. 5186 ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc()); 5187 ++NumExtsMoved; 5188 Inst = ExtFedByLoad; 5189 return true; 5190 } 5191 5192 // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets. 5193 if (ATPConsiderable && 5194 performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5195 HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts)) 5196 return true; 5197 5198 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5199 return false; 5200 } 5201 5202 // Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable. 5203 // If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext 5204 // instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if 5205 // AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the 5206 // extension is just profitable. 5207 bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion( 5208 Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5209 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 5210 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5211 bool Promoted = false; 5212 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts; 5213 bool AllSeenFirst = true; 5214 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5215 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5216 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen = 5217 SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain); 5218 // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote 5219 // it as well. 5220 if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) { 5221 if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr) 5222 UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second); 5223 AllSeenFirst = false; 5224 } 5225 } 5226 5227 if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader && 5228 SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) { 5229 TPT.commit(); 5230 if (HasPromoted) 5231 Promoted = true; 5232 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5233 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5234 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5235 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5236 } 5237 // Update Inst as promotion happen. 5238 Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val(); 5239 } else { 5240 // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain 5241 // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt 5242 // chain derived from the same header. 5243 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5244 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5245 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst; 5246 } 5247 return false; 5248 } 5249 5250 if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty()) 5251 for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) { 5252 if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt)) 5253 continue; 5254 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5255 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5256 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains; 5257 Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt); 5258 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains); 5259 TPT.commit(); 5260 if (HasPromoted) 5261 Promoted = true; 5262 for (auto I : Chains) { 5263 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5264 // Mark this as handled. 5265 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5266 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5267 } 5268 } 5269 return Promoted; 5270 } 5271 5272 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) { 5273 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent(); 5274 5275 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all 5276 // other uses of the source with result of extension. 5277 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0); 5278 if (Src->hasOneUse()) 5279 return false; 5280 5281 // Only do this xform if truncating is free. 5282 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType())) 5283 return false; 5284 5285 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in 5286 // this block. 5287 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent()) 5288 return false; 5289 5290 bool DefIsLiveOut = false; 5291 for (User *U : I->users()) { 5292 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5293 5294 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5295 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5296 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5297 DefIsLiveOut = true; 5298 break; 5299 } 5300 if (!DefIsLiveOut) 5301 return false; 5302 5303 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes. 5304 for (User *U : Src->users()) { 5305 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5306 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5307 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5308 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing 5309 // reloads just before load / store instructions. 5310 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI)) 5311 return false; 5312 } 5313 5314 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once. 5315 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs; 5316 5317 bool MadeChange = false; 5318 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) { 5319 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 5320 5321 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5322 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 5323 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5324 5325 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use. 5326 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB]; 5327 5328 if (!InsertedTrunc) { 5329 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5330 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 5331 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 5332 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc); 5333 } 5334 5335 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result. 5336 U = InsertedTrunc; 5337 ++NumExtUses; 5338 MadeChange = true; 5339 } 5340 5341 return MadeChange; 5342 } 5343 5344 // Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits. Add an "and" 5345 // just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction, 5346 // with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using 5347 // the loaded value. "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion 5348 // of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose 5349 // path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially 5350 // remove. 5351 // 5352 // For example: 5353 // 5354 // b0: 5355 // x = load i32 5356 // ... 5357 // b1: 5358 // y = and x, 0xff 5359 // z = use y 5360 // 5361 // becomes: 5362 // 5363 // b0: 5364 // x = load i32 5365 // x' = and x, 0xff 5366 // ... 5367 // b1: 5368 // z = use x' 5369 // 5370 // whereas: 5371 // 5372 // b0: 5373 // x1 = load i32 5374 // ... 5375 // b1: 5376 // x2 = load i32 5377 // ... 5378 // b2: 5379 // x = phi x1, x2 5380 // y = and x, 0xff 5381 // 5382 // becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load): 5383 // 5384 // b0: 5385 // x1 = load i32 5386 // x1' = and x1, 0xff 5387 // ... 5388 // b1: 5389 // x2 = load i32 5390 // x2' = and x2, 0xff 5391 // ... 5392 // b2: 5393 // x = phi x1', x2' 5394 // y = and x, 0xff 5395 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) { 5396 if (!Load->isSimple() || !Load->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy()) 5397 return false; 5398 5399 // Skip loads we've already transformed. 5400 if (Load->hasOneUse() && 5401 InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin()))) 5402 return false; 5403 5404 // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits 5405 // of the loaded value are needed. 5406 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList; 5407 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited; 5408 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove; 5409 for (auto *U : Load->users()) 5410 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5411 5412 EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType()); 5413 unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits(); 5414 APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0); 5415 APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0); 5416 5417 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 5418 Instruction *I = WorkList.back(); 5419 WorkList.pop_back(); 5420 5421 // Break use-def graph loops. 5422 if (!Visited.insert(I).second) 5423 continue; 5424 5425 // For a PHI node, push all of its users. 5426 if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 5427 for (auto *U : Phi->users()) 5428 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5429 continue; 5430 } 5431 5432 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 5433 case Instruction::And: { 5434 auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5435 if (!AndC) 5436 return false; 5437 APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue(); 5438 DemandBits |= AndBits; 5439 // Keep track of the widest and mask we see. 5440 if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits)) 5441 WidestAndBits = AndBits; 5442 if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load) 5443 AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I); 5444 break; 5445 } 5446 5447 case Instruction::Shl: { 5448 auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5449 if (!ShlC) 5450 return false; 5451 uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1); 5452 DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt); 5453 break; 5454 } 5455 5456 case Instruction::Trunc: { 5457 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType()); 5458 unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits(); 5459 DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth); 5460 break; 5461 } 5462 5463 default: 5464 return false; 5465 } 5466 } 5467 5468 uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits(); 5469 // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the 5470 // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid. For example, 5471 // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but 5472 // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR 5473 // followed by an AND. 5474 // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either 5475 // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to 5476 // a single instruction. 5477 // 5478 // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits 5479 // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel. 5480 if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) || 5481 WidestAndBits != DemandBits) 5482 return false; 5483 5484 LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext(); 5485 Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits); 5486 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy); 5487 5488 // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads. 5489 if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() || 5490 !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT)) 5491 return false; 5492 5493 IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode()); 5494 auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>( 5495 Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits))); 5496 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 5497 // optimizations don't touch it. 5498 InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd); 5499 5500 // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the 5501 // new and itself). 5502 Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5503 NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load); 5504 5505 // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant. 5506 for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove) 5507 // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the 5508 // new and. 5509 if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) { 5510 And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5511 if (&*CurInstIterator == And) 5512 CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator()); 5513 And->eraseFromParent(); 5514 ++NumAndUses; 5515 } 5516 5517 ++NumAndsAdded; 5518 return true; 5519 } 5520 5521 /// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction 5522 /// that is only used once. 5523 static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) { 5524 auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); 5525 // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side 5526 // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute. 5527 return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && 5528 TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive; 5529 } 5530 5531 /// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch. 5532 static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, 5533 const TargetLowering *TLI, 5534 SelectInst *SI) { 5535 // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper. 5536 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive()) 5537 return false; 5538 5539 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine 5540 // whether a select is better represented as a branch. 5541 5542 // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable, 5543 // then we want to replace the select with a branch. 5544 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 5545 if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 5546 uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight); 5547 uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 5548 if (Sum != 0) { 5549 auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum); 5550 if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold()) 5551 return true; 5552 } 5553 } 5554 5555 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition()); 5556 5557 // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its 5558 // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's 5559 // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch. 5560 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse()) 5561 return false; 5562 5563 // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side 5564 // of the select, we should form a branch. 5565 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) || 5566 sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) 5567 return true; 5568 5569 return false; 5570 } 5571 5572 /// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return 5573 /// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any 5574 /// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select 5575 /// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects. 5576 static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue( 5577 SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue, 5578 const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) { 5579 Value *V; 5580 5581 for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI); 5582 DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 5583 assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() && 5584 "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI"); 5585 V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue()); 5586 } 5587 return V; 5588 } 5589 5590 /// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction, 5591 /// turn it into a branch. 5592 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) { 5593 // If branch conversion isn't desirable, exit early. 5594 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI) 5595 return false; 5596 5597 // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition. 5598 SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI; 5599 ASI.push_back(SI); 5600 for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI); 5601 It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) { 5602 SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It); 5603 if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) { 5604 ASI.push_back(I); 5605 } else { 5606 break; 5607 } 5608 } 5609 5610 SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back(); 5611 // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions 5612 // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch. 5613 CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator()); 5614 5615 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1); 5616 5617 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ? 5618 if (VectorCond || SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 5619 return false; 5620 5621 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind; 5622 if (VectorCond) 5623 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect; 5624 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy()) 5625 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal; 5626 else 5627 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect; 5628 5629 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) && 5630 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI)) 5631 return false; 5632 5633 ModifiedDT = true; 5634 5635 // Transform a sequence like this: 5636 // start: 5637 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5638 // %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d 5639 // 5640 // Into: 5641 // start: 5642 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5643 // br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false 5644 // select.true: 5645 // br label %select.end 5646 // select.false: 5647 // br label %select.end 5648 // select.end: 5649 // %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ] 5650 // 5651 // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from 5652 // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch. 5653 // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that 5654 // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the 5655 // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI 5656 // predecessor block will be the start block. 5657 5658 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks. 5659 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent(); 5660 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI)); 5661 BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end"); 5662 5663 // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split. 5664 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 5665 5666 // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch. 5667 // At least one will become an actual new basic block. 5668 BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr; 5669 BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr; 5670 BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr; 5671 BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr; 5672 5673 // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing 5674 // them speculatively. 5675 for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) { 5676 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) { 5677 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 5678 TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink", 5679 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5680 TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock); 5681 TrueBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5682 } 5683 auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue()); 5684 TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch); 5685 } 5686 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) { 5687 if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 5688 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink", 5689 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5690 FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 5691 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5692 } 5693 auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue()); 5694 FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch); 5695 } 5696 } 5697 5698 // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side 5699 // for a new input value to the PHI. 5700 if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) { 5701 assert(TrueBlock == nullptr && 5702 "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select"); 5703 5704 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false", 5705 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5706 auto *FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 5707 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5708 } 5709 5710 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition. 5711 // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths 5712 // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block 5713 // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of 5714 // view of the new PHI. 5715 BasicBlock *TT, *FT; 5716 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 5717 TT = EndBlock; 5718 FT = FalseBlock; 5719 TrueBlock = StartBlock; 5720 } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 5721 TT = TrueBlock; 5722 FT = EndBlock; 5723 FalseBlock = StartBlock; 5724 } else { 5725 TT = TrueBlock; 5726 FT = FalseBlock; 5727 } 5728 IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI); 5729 5730 SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS; 5731 INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end()); 5732 // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the 5733 // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select 5734 // to get the PHI operand. 5735 for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) { 5736 SelectInst *SI = *It; 5737 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node. 5738 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front()); 5739 PN->takeName(SI); 5740 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock); 5741 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock); 5742 PN->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5743 5744 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 5745 SI->eraseFromParent(); 5746 INS.erase(SI); 5747 ++NumSelectsExpanded; 5748 } 5749 5750 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block. 5751 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end(); 5752 return true; 5753 } 5754 5755 static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 5756 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask()); 5757 int SplatElem = -1; 5758 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) { 5759 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem) 5760 return false; 5761 SplatElem = Mask[i]; 5762 } 5763 5764 return true; 5765 } 5766 5767 /// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same 5768 /// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases 5769 /// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that 5770 /// codegen can spot all lanes are identical. 5771 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 5772 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent(); 5773 5774 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive. 5775 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType())) 5776 return false; 5777 5778 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a 5779 // constant splat. 5780 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI)) 5781 return false; 5782 5783 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once. 5784 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles; 5785 5786 bool MadeChange = false; 5787 for (User *U : SVI->users()) { 5788 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5789 5790 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5791 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5792 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5793 5794 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction. 5795 if (!UI->isShift()) continue; 5796 5797 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't 5798 // already have a copy. 5799 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB]; 5800 5801 if (!InsertedShuffle) { 5802 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5803 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 5804 InsertedShuffle = 5805 new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1), 5806 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt); 5807 } 5808 5809 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle); 5810 MadeChange = true; 5811 } 5812 5813 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle. 5814 if (SVI->use_empty()) { 5815 SVI->eraseFromParent(); 5816 MadeChange = true; 5817 } 5818 5819 return MadeChange; 5820 } 5821 5822 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) { 5823 if (!TLI || !DL) 5824 return false; 5825 5826 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); 5827 Type *OldType = Cond->getType(); 5828 LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext(); 5829 MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType)); 5830 unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits(); 5831 5832 if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth()) 5833 return false; 5834 5835 // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition 5836 // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the 5837 // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent 5838 // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the 5839 // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends, 5840 // where N is the number of cases in the switch. 5841 auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth); 5842 5843 // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch 5844 // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended. 5845 // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending 5846 // everything instead. 5847 Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt; 5848 if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond)) 5849 if (Arg->hasSExtAttr()) 5850 ExtType = Instruction::SExt; 5851 5852 auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType); 5853 ExtInst->insertBefore(SI); 5854 ExtInst->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5855 SI->setCondition(ExtInst); 5856 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) { 5857 APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue(); 5858 APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ? 5859 NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth); 5860 Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst)); 5861 } 5862 5863 return true; 5864 } 5865 5866 5867 namespace { 5868 5869 /// Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one. 5870 /// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition. 5871 /// E.g., 5872 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 5873 /// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0 5874 /// c = scalar_op b 5875 /// store c 5876 /// 5877 /// => 5878 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 5879 /// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane) 5880 /// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0 5881 /// * store d 5882 /// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the 5883 /// transition. 5884 class VectorPromoteHelper { 5885 /// DataLayout associated with the current module. 5886 const DataLayout &DL; 5887 5888 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations. 5889 const TargetLowering &TLI; 5890 5891 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain. 5892 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI; 5893 5894 /// The transition being moved downwards. 5895 Instruction *Transition; 5896 5897 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted. 5898 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted; 5899 5900 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract. 5901 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost; 5902 5903 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition. 5904 Instruction *CombineInst = nullptr; 5905 5906 /// The instruction that represents the current end of the transition. 5907 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain 5908 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition. 5909 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const { 5910 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty()) 5911 return Transition; 5912 return InstsToBePromoted.back(); 5913 } 5914 5915 /// Return the index of the original value in the transition. 5916 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value, 5917 /// c, is at index 0. 5918 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const { 5919 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 5920 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 5921 return 0; 5922 } 5923 5924 /// Return the index of the index in the transition. 5925 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index 5926 /// is at index 1. 5927 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const { 5928 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 5929 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 5930 return 1; 5931 } 5932 5933 /// Get the type of the transition. 5934 /// This is the type of the original value. 5935 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the 5936 /// transition is <2 x i32>. 5937 Type *getTransitionType() const { 5938 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType(); 5939 } 5940 5941 /// Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through. 5942 /// I.e., we have the following sequence: 5943 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2> 5944 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ... 5945 /// => 5946 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ... 5947 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2> 5948 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted); 5949 5950 /// Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the 5951 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted. 5952 bool isProfitableToPromote() { 5953 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 5954 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx) 5955 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue() 5956 : -1; 5957 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType(); 5958 5959 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst); 5960 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace(); 5961 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment(); 5962 // Check if this store is supported. 5963 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses( 5964 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS, 5965 Align)) { 5966 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine 5967 // the extract with the store. 5968 return false; 5969 } 5970 5971 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition 5972 // scalar to vector. 5973 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost. 5974 uint64_t ScalarCost = 5975 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index); 5976 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost; 5977 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) { 5978 // Compute the cost. 5979 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones. 5980 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat 5981 // constant. 5982 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0); 5983 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) || 5984 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0); 5985 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK = 5986 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 5987 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 5988 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK = 5989 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 5990 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 5991 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost( 5992 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 5993 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType, 5994 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 5995 } 5996 LLVM_DEBUG( 5997 dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: " 5998 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n'); 5999 return ScalarCost > VectorCost; 6000 } 6001 6002 /// Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same 6003 /// number of elements as the transition. 6004 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated 6005 /// across the whole vector. 6006 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>, 6007 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible: 6008 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only 6009 /// used at the index of the extract. 6010 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const { 6011 unsigned ExtractIdx = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6012 if (!UseSplat) { 6013 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to 6014 // use a splat constant. 6015 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx()); 6016 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx)) 6017 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue(); 6018 else 6019 UseSplat = true; 6020 } 6021 6022 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements(); 6023 if (UseSplat) 6024 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val); 6025 6026 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec; 6027 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType()); 6028 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) { 6029 if (Idx == ExtractIdx) 6030 ConstVec.push_back(Val); 6031 else 6032 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal); 6033 } 6034 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec); 6035 } 6036 6037 /// Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx 6038 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior. 6039 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use, 6040 unsigned OperandIdx) { 6041 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on 6042 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction. 6043 if (OperandIdx != 1) 6044 return false; 6045 switch (Use->getOpcode()) { 6046 default: 6047 return false; 6048 case Instruction::SDiv: 6049 case Instruction::UDiv: 6050 case Instruction::SRem: 6051 case Instruction::URem: 6052 return true; 6053 case Instruction::FDiv: 6054 case Instruction::FRem: 6055 return !Use->hasNoNaNs(); 6056 } 6057 llvm_unreachable(nullptr); 6058 } 6059 6060 public: 6061 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI, 6062 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition, 6063 unsigned CombineCost) 6064 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition), 6065 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost) { 6066 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null"); 6067 } 6068 6069 /// Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type. 6070 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6071 // We could support CastInst too. 6072 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted); 6073 } 6074 6075 /// Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted 6076 /// by moving downward the transition through. 6077 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6078 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded. 6079 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions. 6080 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6081 const Value *Val = U.get(); 6082 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) { 6083 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs, 6084 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a 6085 // division by zero. 6086 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())) 6087 return false; 6088 continue; 6089 } 6090 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) && 6091 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) 6092 return false; 6093 } 6094 // Check that the resulting operation is legal. 6095 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode()); 6096 if (!ISDOpcode) 6097 return false; 6098 return StressStoreExtract || 6099 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 6100 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true)); 6101 } 6102 6103 /// Check whether or not \p Use can be combined 6104 /// with the transition. 6105 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse? 6106 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); } 6107 6108 /// Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted. 6109 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6110 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted); 6111 } 6112 6113 /// Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition. 6114 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) { 6115 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine"); 6116 CombineInst = ToBeCombined; 6117 } 6118 6119 /// Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is 6120 /// is profitable. 6121 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise. 6122 bool promote() { 6123 // Check if there is something to promote. 6124 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with, 6125 // we assume the promotion is not profitable. 6126 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst) 6127 return false; 6128 6129 // Check cost. 6130 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote()) 6131 return false; 6132 6133 // Promote. 6134 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted) 6135 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted); 6136 InstsToBePromoted.clear(); 6137 return true; 6138 } 6139 }; 6140 6141 } // end anonymous namespace 6142 6143 void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6144 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def 6145 // can be statically promoted. 6146 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted: 6147 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a 6148 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2 6149 // Move the transition down. 6150 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition. 6151 // = ... b => = ... Def. 6152 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() && 6153 "The type of the result of the transition does not match " 6154 "the final type"); 6155 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition); 6156 // 2. Update the type of the uses. 6157 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def. 6158 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType(); 6159 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy); 6160 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted 6161 // operands. 6162 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a. 6163 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6164 Value *Val = U.get(); 6165 Value *NewVal = nullptr; 6166 if (Val == Transition) 6167 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 6168 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) || 6169 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) { 6170 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef. 6171 NewVal = getConstantVector( 6172 cast<Constant>(Val), 6173 isa<UndefValue>(Val) || 6174 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())); 6175 } else 6176 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update " 6177 "this?"); 6178 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal); 6179 } 6180 Transition->moveAfter(ToBePromoted); 6181 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted); 6182 } 6183 6184 /// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction. 6185 /// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target 6186 /// has this feature and this is profitable. 6187 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) { 6188 unsigned CombineCost = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6189 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI || 6190 (!StressStoreExtract && 6191 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(), 6192 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost))) 6193 return false; 6194 6195 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition. 6196 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until: 6197 // - We can combine the transition with its single use 6198 // => we got rid of the transition. 6199 // - We escape the current basic block 6200 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and 6201 // we do not do that for now. 6202 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent(); 6203 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n'); 6204 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost); 6205 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be 6206 // beneficial. 6207 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) { 6208 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 6209 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6210 6211 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) { 6212 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block (" 6213 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName() 6214 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() 6215 << ").\n"); 6216 return false; 6217 } 6218 6219 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) { 6220 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n' 6221 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6222 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted); 6223 bool Changed = VPH.promote(); 6224 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed; 6225 return Changed; 6226 } 6227 6228 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n"); 6229 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted)) 6230 return false; 6231 6232 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n"); 6233 6234 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted); 6235 Inst = ToBePromoted; 6236 } 6237 return false; 6238 } 6239 6240 /// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values 6241 /// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory. 6242 /// Sometimes it is more efficient to generate separate stores for F and I, 6243 /// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places. 6244 /// 6245 /// (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64), 6246 /// (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr) --> 6247 /// (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4) 6248 /// 6249 /// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like: 6250 /// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6251 /// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6252 /// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6253 /// For pair of {i16, i8}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6254 /// For pair of {i8, i8}, i16 store --> two i8 stores. 6255 /// 6256 /// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is 6257 /// supported. 6258 /// 6259 /// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below 6260 /// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo. 6261 /// void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &); 6262 /// hoo() { 6263 /// ... 6264 /// goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp)); 6265 /// ... 6266 /// } 6267 /// 6268 /// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate 6269 /// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across 6270 /// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated 6271 /// during code expansion. 6272 static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL, 6273 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 6274 // Handle simple but common cases only. 6275 Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType(); 6276 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) || 6277 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0) 6278 return false; 6279 6280 unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2; 6281 Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize); 6282 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) != 6283 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType)) 6284 return false; 6285 6286 // Match the following patterns: 6287 // (store (or (zext LValue to i64), 6288 // (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6289 // or 6290 // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6291 // (zext LValue to i64), 6292 // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only 6293 // one use. 6294 Value *LValue, *HValue; 6295 if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(), 6296 m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))), 6297 m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))), 6298 m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize)))))) 6299 return false; 6300 6301 // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32. 6302 if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6303 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize || 6304 !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6305 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize) 6306 return false; 6307 6308 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast 6309 // as the input of target query. 6310 auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue); 6311 auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue); 6312 EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6313 : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType()); 6314 EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6315 : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType()); 6316 if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy)) 6317 return false; 6318 6319 // Start to split store. 6320 IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext()); 6321 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI); 6322 6323 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current 6324 // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner. 6325 if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6326 LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType()); 6327 if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6328 HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType()); 6329 6330 bool IsLE = SI.getModule()->getDataLayout().isLittleEndian(); 6331 auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) { 6332 V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType); 6333 Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast( 6334 SI.getOperand(1), 6335 SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace())); 6336 if ((IsLE && Upper) || (!IsLE && !Upper)) 6337 Addr = Builder.CreateGEP( 6338 SplitStoreType, Addr, 6339 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1)); 6340 Builder.CreateAlignedStore( 6341 V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment()); 6342 }; 6343 6344 CreateSplitStore(LValue, false); 6345 CreateSplitStore(HValue, true); 6346 6347 // Delete the old store. 6348 SI.eraseFromParent(); 6349 return true; 6350 } 6351 6352 // Return true if the GEP has two operands, the first operand is of a sequential 6353 // type, and the second operand is a constant. 6354 static bool GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GetElementPtrInst *GEP) { 6355 gep_type_iterator I = gep_type_begin(*GEP); 6356 return GEP->getNumOperands() == 2 && 6357 I.isSequential() && 6358 isa<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(1)); 6359 } 6360 6361 // Try unmerging GEPs to reduce liveness interference (register pressure) across 6362 // IndirectBr edges. Since IndirectBr edges tend to touch on many blocks, 6363 // reducing liveness interference across those edges benefits global register 6364 // allocation. Currently handles only certain cases. 6365 // 6366 // For example, unmerge %GEPI and %UGEPI as below. 6367 // 6368 // ---------- BEFORE ---------- 6369 // SrcBlock: 6370 // ... 6371 // %GEPIOp = ... 6372 // ... 6373 // %GEPI = gep %GEPIOp, Idx 6374 // ... 6375 // indirectbr ... [ label %DstB0, label %DstB1, ... label %DstBi ... ] 6376 // (* %GEPI is alive on the indirectbr edges due to other uses ahead) 6377 // (* %GEPIOp is alive on the indirectbr edges only because of it's used by 6378 // %UGEPI) 6379 // 6380 // DstB0: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6381 // DstB1: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6382 // ... 6383 // 6384 // DstBi: 6385 // ... 6386 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPIOp, UIdx 6387 // ... 6388 // --------------------------- 6389 // 6390 // ---------- AFTER ---------- 6391 // SrcBlock: 6392 // ... (same as above) 6393 // (* %GEPI is still alive on the indirectbr edges) 6394 // (* %GEPIOp is no longer alive on the indirectbr edges as a result of the 6395 // unmerging) 6396 // ... 6397 // 6398 // DstBi: 6399 // ... 6400 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPI, (UIdx-Idx) 6401 // ... 6402 // --------------------------- 6403 // 6404 // The register pressure on the IndirectBr edges is reduced because %GEPIOp is 6405 // no longer alive on them. 6406 // 6407 // We try to unmerge GEPs here in CodGenPrepare, as opposed to limiting merging 6408 // of GEPs in the first place in InstCombiner::visitGetElementPtrInst() so as 6409 // not to disable further simplications and optimizations as a result of GEP 6410 // merging. 6411 // 6412 // Note this unmerging may increase the length of the data flow critical path 6413 // (the path from %GEPIOp to %UGEPI would go through %GEPI), which is a tradeoff 6414 // between the register pressure and the length of data-flow critical 6415 // path. Restricting this to the uncommon IndirectBr case would minimize the 6416 // impact of potentially longer critical path, if any, and the impact on compile 6417 // time. 6418 static bool tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GetElementPtrInst *GEPI, 6419 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) { 6420 BasicBlock *SrcBlock = GEPI->getParent(); 6421 // Check that SrcBlock ends with an IndirectBr. If not, give up. The common 6422 // (non-IndirectBr) cases exit early here. 6423 if (!isa<IndirectBrInst>(SrcBlock->getTerminator())) 6424 return false; 6425 // Check that GEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index. 6426 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GEPI)) 6427 return false; 6428 ConstantInt *GEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(GEPI->getOperand(1)); 6429 // Check that GEPI is a cheap one. 6430 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(GEPIIdx->getValue(), GEPIIdx->getType()) 6431 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6432 return false; 6433 Value *GEPIOp = GEPI->getOperand(0); 6434 // Check that GEPIOp is an instruction that's also defined in SrcBlock. 6435 if (!isa<Instruction>(GEPIOp)) 6436 return false; 6437 auto *GEPIOpI = cast<Instruction>(GEPIOp); 6438 if (GEPIOpI->getParent() != SrcBlock) 6439 return false; 6440 // Check that GEP is used outside the block, meaning it's alive on the 6441 // IndirectBr edge(s). 6442 if (find_if(GEPI->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6443 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Usr)) { 6444 if (I->getParent() != SrcBlock) { 6445 return true; 6446 } 6447 } 6448 return false; 6449 }) == GEPI->users().end()) 6450 return false; 6451 // The second elements of the GEP chains to be unmerged. 6452 std::vector<GetElementPtrInst *> UGEPIs; 6453 // Check each user of GEPIOp to check if unmerging would make GEPIOp not alive 6454 // on IndirectBr edges. 6455 for (User *Usr : GEPIOp->users()) { 6456 if (Usr == GEPI) continue; 6457 // Check if Usr is an Instruction. If not, give up. 6458 if (!isa<Instruction>(Usr)) 6459 return false; 6460 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(Usr); 6461 // Check if Usr in the same block as GEPIOp, which is fine, skip. 6462 if (UI->getParent() == SrcBlock) 6463 continue; 6464 // Check if Usr is a GEP. If not, give up. 6465 if (!isa<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr)) 6466 return false; 6467 auto *UGEPI = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr); 6468 // Check if UGEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index and GEPIOp is 6469 // the pointer operand to it. If so, record it in the vector. If not, give 6470 // up. 6471 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(UGEPI)) 6472 return false; 6473 if (UGEPI->getOperand(0) != GEPIOp) 6474 return false; 6475 if (GEPIIdx->getType() != 6476 cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1))->getType()) 6477 return false; 6478 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6479 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(UGEPIIdx->getValue(), UGEPIIdx->getType()) 6480 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6481 return false; 6482 UGEPIs.push_back(UGEPI); 6483 } 6484 if (UGEPIs.size() == 0) 6485 return false; 6486 // Check the materializing cost of (Uidx-Idx). 6487 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6488 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6489 APInt NewIdx = UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue(); 6490 unsigned ImmCost = TTI->getIntImmCost(NewIdx, GEPIIdx->getType()); 6491 if (ImmCost > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6492 return false; 6493 } 6494 // Now unmerge between GEPI and UGEPIs. 6495 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6496 UGEPI->setOperand(0, GEPI); 6497 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6498 Constant *NewUGEPIIdx = 6499 ConstantInt::get(GEPIIdx->getType(), 6500 UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue()); 6501 UGEPI->setOperand(1, NewUGEPIIdx); 6502 // If GEPI is not inbounds but UGEPI is inbounds, change UGEPI to not 6503 // inbounds to avoid UB. 6504 if (!GEPI->isInBounds()) { 6505 UGEPI->setIsInBounds(false); 6506 } 6507 } 6508 // After unmerging, verify that GEPIOp is actually only used in SrcBlock (not 6509 // alive on IndirectBr edges). 6510 assert(find_if(GEPIOp->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6511 return cast<Instruction>(Usr)->getParent() != SrcBlock; 6512 }) == GEPIOp->users().end() && "GEPIOp is used outside SrcBlock"); 6513 return true; 6514 } 6515 6516 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT) { 6517 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from 6518 // stepping on each other's toes. 6519 if (InsertedInsts.count(I)) 6520 return false; 6521 6522 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 6523 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG) 6524 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a 6525 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here. 6526 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) { 6527 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 6528 P->eraseFromParent(); 6529 ++NumPHIsElim; 6530 return true; 6531 } 6532 return false; 6533 } 6534 6535 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) { 6536 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have 6537 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold 6538 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant 6539 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist 6540 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't 6541 // want to forward-subst the cast. 6542 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0))) 6543 return false; 6544 6545 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL)) 6546 return true; 6547 6548 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) { 6549 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't 6550 /// fit in one register 6551 if (TLI && 6552 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), 6553 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) == 6554 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) { 6555 return SinkCast(CI); 6556 } else { 6557 bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I); 6558 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I); 6559 } 6560 } 6561 return false; 6562 } 6563 6564 if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) 6565 if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters()) 6566 return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI, TLI); 6567 6568 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) { 6569 LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6570 if (TLI) { 6571 bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI); 6572 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6573 Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS); 6574 return Modified; 6575 } 6576 return false; 6577 } 6578 6579 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) { 6580 if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI)) 6581 return true; 6582 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6583 if (TLI) { 6584 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6585 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1), 6586 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS); 6587 } 6588 return false; 6589 } 6590 6591 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) { 6592 unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6593 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(), 6594 RMW->getType(), AS); 6595 } 6596 6597 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) { 6598 unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6599 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(), 6600 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS); 6601 } 6602 6603 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I); 6604 6605 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) && 6606 EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI) 6607 return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts); 6608 6609 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr || 6610 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) { 6611 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1)); 6612 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn()) 6613 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL); 6614 6615 return false; 6616 } 6617 6618 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) { 6619 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) { 6620 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast 6621 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(), 6622 GEPI->getName(), GEPI); 6623 NC->setDebugLoc(GEPI->getDebugLoc()); 6624 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC); 6625 GEPI->eraseFromParent(); 6626 ++NumGEPsElim; 6627 optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT); 6628 return true; 6629 } 6630 if (tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GEPI, TTI)) { 6631 return true; 6632 } 6633 return false; 6634 } 6635 6636 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I)) 6637 return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT); 6638 6639 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) 6640 return optimizeSelectInst(SI); 6641 6642 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I)) 6643 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI); 6644 6645 if (auto *Switch = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(I)) 6646 return optimizeSwitchInst(Switch); 6647 6648 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I)) 6649 return optimizeExtractElementInst(I); 6650 6651 return false; 6652 } 6653 6654 /// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse 6655 /// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true. 6656 static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL, 6657 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 6658 if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6659 !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE, 6660 TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true))) 6661 return false; 6662 6663 SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts; 6664 if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts)) 6665 return false; 6666 Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back(); 6667 I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst); 6668 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I); 6669 return true; 6670 } 6671 6672 // In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used 6673 // across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time 6674 // selection. 6675 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT) { 6676 SunkAddrs.clear(); 6677 bool MadeChange = false; 6678 6679 CurInstIterator = BB.begin(); 6680 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) { 6681 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT); 6682 if (ModifiedDT) 6683 return true; 6684 } 6685 6686 bool MadeBitReverse = true; 6687 while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) { 6688 MadeBitReverse = false; 6689 for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) { 6690 if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) { 6691 MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true; 6692 ModifiedDT = true; 6693 break; 6694 } 6695 } 6696 } 6697 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB); 6698 6699 return MadeChange; 6700 } 6701 6702 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able 6703 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not 6704 // find a node corresponding to the value. 6705 bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) { 6706 bool MadeChange = false; 6707 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 6708 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr; 6709 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) { 6710 Instruction *Insn = &*BI++; 6711 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn); 6712 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These 6713 // intrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca) 6714 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca 6715 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to 6716 // where said address is used. 6717 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) { 6718 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn; 6719 continue; 6720 } 6721 6722 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue()); 6723 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) { 6724 // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert 6725 // after it. 6726 if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 6727 continue; 6728 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" 6729 << *DVI << ' ' << *VI); 6730 DVI->removeFromParent(); 6731 if (isa<PHINode>(VI)) 6732 DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt()); 6733 else 6734 DVI->insertAfter(VI); 6735 MadeChange = true; 6736 ++NumDbgValueMoved; 6737 } 6738 } 6739 } 6740 return MadeChange; 6741 } 6742 6743 /// Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t. 6744 static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) { 6745 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse; 6746 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / std::numeric_limits<uint32_t>::max()) + 1; 6747 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale; 6748 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale; 6749 } 6750 6751 /// Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like: 6752 /// \code 6753 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 6754 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 6755 /// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1 6756 /// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 6757 /// \endcode 6758 /// into multiple branch instructions like: 6759 /// \code 6760 /// bb1: 6761 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 6762 /// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2 6763 /// bb2: 6764 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 6765 /// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 6766 /// \endcode 6767 /// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations 6768 /// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is 6769 /// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions. 6770 /// 6771 /// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG. 6772 /// 6773 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) { 6774 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive()) 6775 return false; 6776 6777 bool MadeChange = false; 6778 for (auto &BB : F) { 6779 // Does this BB end with the following? 6780 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 6781 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 6782 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2 6783 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2" 6784 BinaryOperator *LogicOp; 6785 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB; 6786 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB))) 6787 continue; 6788 6789 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator()); 6790 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 6791 continue; 6792 6793 unsigned Opc; 6794 Value *Cond1, *Cond2; 6795 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 6796 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 6797 Opc = Instruction::And; 6798 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 6799 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 6800 Opc = Instruction::Or; 6801 else 6802 continue; 6803 6804 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) || 6805 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ) 6806 continue; 6807 6808 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump()); 6809 6810 // Create a new BB. 6811 auto TmpBB = 6812 BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split", 6813 BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode()); 6814 6815 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the 6816 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction. 6817 Br1->setCondition(Cond1); 6818 LogicOp->eraseFromParent(); 6819 6820 // Depending on the condition we have to either replace the true or the 6821 // false successor of the original branch instruction. 6822 if (Opc == Instruction::And) 6823 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB); 6824 else 6825 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB); 6826 6827 // Fill in the new basic block. 6828 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB); 6829 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) { 6830 I->removeFromParent(); 6831 I->insertBefore(Br2); 6832 } 6833 6834 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be 6835 // replaced in one successor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from 6836 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one 6837 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target 6838 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition 6839 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that 6840 // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes. 6841 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch 6842 // instruction (or any other instruction). 6843 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) 6844 std::swap(TBB, FBB); 6845 6846 // Replace the old BB with the new BB. 6847 for (PHINode &PN : TBB->phis()) { 6848 int i; 6849 while ((i = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0) 6850 PN.setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB); 6851 } 6852 6853 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB. 6854 for (PHINode &PN : FBB->phis()) { 6855 auto *Val = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB); 6856 PN.addIncoming(Val, TmpBB); 6857 } 6858 6859 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder:: 6860 // FindMergedConditions). 6861 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) { 6862 // Codegen X | Y as: 6863 // BB1: 6864 // jmp_if_X TBB 6865 // jmp TmpBB 6866 // TmpBB: 6867 // jmp_if_Y TBB 6868 // jmp FBB 6869 // 6870 6871 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB. 6872 // The requirement is that 6873 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB) 6874 // = TrueProb for original BB. 6875 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 6876 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice 6877 // assumes that 6878 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB. 6879 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for 6880 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated. 6881 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 6882 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 6883 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 6884 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight; 6885 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 6886 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 6887 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 6888 6889 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 6890 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight; 6891 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 6892 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 6893 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 6894 } 6895 } else { 6896 // Codegen X & Y as: 6897 // BB1: 6898 // jmp_if_X TmpBB 6899 // jmp FBB 6900 // TmpBB: 6901 // jmp_if_Y TBB 6902 // jmp FBB 6903 // 6904 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB. 6905 6906 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB. 6907 // The requirement is that 6908 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB) 6909 // = FalseProb for original BB. 6910 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 6911 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice 6912 // assumes that 6913 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB. 6914 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 6915 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 6916 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 6917 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 6918 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 6919 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 6920 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 6921 6922 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight; 6923 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 6924 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 6925 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 6926 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 6927 } 6928 } 6929 6930 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never 6931 // available to CodeGenPrepare. 6932 ModifiedDT = true; 6933 6934 MadeChange = true; 6935 6936 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump(); 6937 TmpBB->dump()); 6938 } 6939 return MadeChange; 6940 } 6941